JP2019013678A - Portable terminal, program, and information management system - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a portable terminal, a program, and an information management system capable of acquiring and displaying actual game result information provided by radio signals from each game machine by allowing an inspector to patrol a passage or the like within a hall shop.SOLUTION: A BLE module 49 is packaged on a board of an external centralized terminal 47 of a slot machine 1, and the BLE module 49 transmits a game machine ID and winning combination ratio information by radio. A portable terminal 1700 held by an inspector or the like receives the game machine ID and the winning combination ratio information from each game machine and displays game machine information (game machine icons, winning combination ratio information, and the like) on a display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700, based on the information. A display mode of the game machine information is controlled, for example, according to signal strength or the like of the received radio signals.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a portable terminal that receives a signal from a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine or a pachinko machine.

  With regard to gaming machines located in hall stores (game halls), a display is provided to display gaming information (indexes related to gaming performance), and whether or not the gaming machine satisfies the original performance at any timing It is preferable to be able to check, and such a configuration is also a request from the industry.

  For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that stores game information on a predetermined number of games and displays the information on a credit display or a liquid crystal display.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-87235

  Such game information may include a value indicating a probability of jackpot or a tendency to play, and is displayed on a display installed inside the gaming machine in order to prevent the player from seeing the game information. It is desirable.

  Therefore, the said indicator is considered so that it may be comprised as an LED indicator arrange | positioned on the main board | substrate in a game machine, for example. In this case, the inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine unlocks a part of each gaming machine (for example, the front door), then opens the part and displays it on the LED display on the main board. Further, by reading an index indicating the performance of the gaming machine, it is inspected whether or not the gaming machine is in accordance with the original performance (there is no unauthorized modification).

  However, such an inspector's check of the index requires opening the front door of the gaming machine, etc., so it must be performed after the store is closed or when there is no player, and the timing and period of the inspection are limited. .

  In addition, a lot of gaming machines are arranged in the hall store. If you check the index displayed on the display by opening the front door etc. for each of these gaming machines, it takes a long time for the inspection. It will take. Furthermore, in each gaming machine, usually, a plurality of indicators are shown. For example, when the indicators are sequentially displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds), all It takes a long time to check the indicators.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a portable terminal and a program that can acquire and display game performance information provided by radio signals from each gaming machine by an inspector patrolling a passage in a hall store, etc. And providing an information management system.

  The present invention provides the following portable terminal, program, and information management system.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Wireless signal receiving means (for example, a wireless signal receiving antenna 1707 and a main CPU 1701) for receiving a signal transmitted from a gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1) by wireless communication (for example, wireless communication based on the BLE standard);
Gaming machine information for obtaining gaming machine identification information (for example, gaming machine ID) for identifying the gaming machine and gaming performance information (for example, role ratio information) for the gaming machine from the signal received by the wireless signal receiving means. Acquisition means (for example, main CPU 1701);
Information related to the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information (for example, the signal strength of the received signal or the degree of change in the signal strength at a predetermined time) based on the reception status of the signal in the wireless signal receiving means (for example, A gaming machine information display control means (for example, main CPU 1701) for controlling to display a role ratio information display unit 3026, a gaming machine icon display unit 3022, a map display for each gaming machine, and the like. A terminal (eg, mobile terminal 1700).

  With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to acquire and display game performance information provided by a radio signal from each gaming machine in a portable terminal when an inspector patrols a passage in a hall store, etc. Therefore, the inspector can efficiently inspect the performance and correctness of the gaming machine.

The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Mobile device
Wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted from a gaming machine by wireless communication;
Gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying the gaming machine and gaming performance information relating to the gaming machine from the signal received by the wireless signal receiving means; and
A program (for example, from a predetermined server) that functions as a gaming machine information display control unit that controls to display information about the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information based on the reception status of the signal in the wireless signal receiving unit. A program downloaded to the portable terminal 1700 and installed in the portable terminal 1700).

  With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to acquire and display game performance information provided by a radio signal from each gaming machine in a portable terminal when an inspector patrols a passage in a hall store, etc. Therefore, the inspector can efficiently inspect the performance and correctness of the gaming machine.

The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine that transmits signals by wireless communication;
An information management system (for example, an information management system 1001) including a server (for example, an information management server 1100) that provides information related to the gaming machine to a mobile terminal;
The gaming machine transmits gaming machine identification information for identifying the gaming machine and gaming result information regarding the gaming machine by the wireless communication,
The server includes hall store gaming machine identification information relating to a plurality of gaming machines in the hall store (for example, list information (gaming machine information table 1152) in which gaming machine IDs and gaming machine numbers are associated), and each gaming machine Providing information (map information table 1153) indicating the arrangement position in the hall store of the mobile terminal,
When the portable terminal receives the signal from the gaming machine, the reception status of the signal, the gaming machine identification information acquired from the signal, and the gaming machine identification information in the hall store acquired from the server Based on the information, the information about the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information is displayed together with the information about the gaming machine identification information in the hall store (for example, the role information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A and the role shown in FIG. 66B). Ratio information display screen 3011, role information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68, role information display screen 3031 shown in FIG. 70B, role information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71, etc.).

  With such a configuration of the present invention, it is possible to acquire and display game performance information provided by a radio signal from each gaming machine in a portable terminal when an inspector patrols a passage in a hall store, etc. Therefore, the inspector can efficiently inspect the performance and correctness of the gaming machine.

  With the portable terminal of the present invention, the inspector circulates the passage in the hall store, etc., so that the game result information provided by the radio signal from each gaming machine can be acquired and displayed on the portable terminal. .

  Moreover, since the game performance information provided by radio signals from each gaming machine is displayed by the portable terminal or the like of the present invention, the inspector can efficiently inspect the performance and legitimacy of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, in the portable terminal or the like of the present invention, the distance between the portable terminal and the gaming machine can be grasped, so that it is possible to easily recognize which gaming machine the received gaming performance information belongs to. In addition, since the portable terminal can acquire a list of hall machine IDs and map information from the server, when the game machine ID of the game machine that has been approached by inspection is received, the inspected game machine is erased. It is possible to eliminate inspection leakage.

  Further, when the mobile terminal receives the map information, the arrangement of the gaming machines in the hall store can be displayed by the GUI, which makes it easier for the inspector to grasp the position of the gaming machine.

It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance structure of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows schematic structure of the various display screens displayed on the sub display apparatus of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ratio monitor in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the data display apparatus connected to the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state between the bonus state and non-bonus state of a pachislot in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the ART gaming state, the non-ART gaming state, and the bonus state of the pachislot in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of power activation (reset interruption) performed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main process (main operation process) performed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal reception / start check process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio monitor display switching process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number acquisition process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning search process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a prize check and medal payout process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio monitor total process (non-regulation) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the data table used for the ratio monitor total process (non-regulation) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the data table used for the ratio monitor total process (non-regulation) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the advantageous area total process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation data setting process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation process (approximate value type | formula) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ratio calculation process (approximate value type | formula) in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the payout number total process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medium time totaling process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process performed by the main control circuit of the game machine in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio monitor display management process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio monitor display management process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio monitor display management process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of role ratio information transmission in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BLE transmission control process in 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the role ratio origin data transmission process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BLE transmission control process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. In 2nd Embodiment of this invention, it is a figure which shows the condition where ratio ratio origin data is transmitted to the BLE module from the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the loading process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the data storage process in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module in 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the sand apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation unit of the sand apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information management server in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the portable terminal in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall computer in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sand apparatus in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the island edge counter in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of POS in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hall | hole management terminal in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a functional block diagram of the information management server in the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a functional block diagram of the portable terminal in the information management system concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the layout of the hall store which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the role information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transmission timing of the radio signal transmission circuit which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the ratio information display screen in the ratio information display control process which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module which concern on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine distribution management process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the connection form of the main control circuit and BLE module which concern on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine condition transmission process which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game machine condition check process which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management process which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management process which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game information management process which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the privilege management process which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the privilege management process which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the AR display management process which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the camera image display screen in the AR display management process which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | positioning form of the radio signal transmission apparatus in a hall store based on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the table utilized with the information management system which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the notification information management process which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the wireless communication control process which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the outline | summary of the information management system which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the radio signal transmission aspect of the radio signal transmission apparatus utilized in the information management system which concerns on 12th Embodiment of this invention.

<< First Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the configuration and operation thereof will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a pachislot machine having a bonus operation function and an ART function will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along an after-mentioned effective line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as payout of medals, replay (replay) operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “out of” other than that. Such a thing is provided. In the following, a combination relating to the payout of medals is referred to as a “small combination”, and a combination relating to replay (replay) operation is referred to as a “replay combination”. In addition, a combination related to a bonus operation (bonus game) is also referred to as a “bonus combination”.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachi-slot, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is determined for four symbols.

  The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the symbol combination display related to the winning is determined, normally, the symbol combination is placed on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (four symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reel using a specified time so that the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the active line.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the active line relates to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in the main control circuit described later. Then, when the combination of the displayed symbols is determined to be related to winning by the winning determination means, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game).

  Also, in the pachislot, in the series of gaming operations described above, various effects can be achieved by displaying images on a display device, outputting light from various lamps, outputting sound from a speaker, or a combination thereof. Is done.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for presentation is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random number is extracted, the effect content determination means determines the effect to be executed this time from lots of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determination means is one of various processing means (processing functions) provided in a sub-control circuit described later.

  Next, when the content of the effect is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot, for example, by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination, there is an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached so that the opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display columns) are provided in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (main reels) are also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (reel rotation direction).

  The front door 2 b includes a lock 5, a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1. Moreover, the door main body 9 is locked (locked) using the lock 5 (that is, the closed state of the front door 2b is maintained and the open state is limited). The lock 5 is provided at the right side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1, and an unlocking operation using a door key (not shown) is performed. 2b is opened. In addition, as a lock mechanism (locking device) of the front door 2b, other lock mechanisms (for example, a locking device using electronic authentication) can be employed.

  The front panel 10 is provided on the upper portion of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is constituted by a frame-like member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is disposed to face a display device 11 described later disposed inside the cabinet 2a.

  The display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the video (image) displayed on the display device 11 described later via the display device cover 30. In the present embodiment, the display device cover 30 is formed of a black translucent synthetic resin, thereby suppressing the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11. Is clearly visible.

  A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, lamps 21 a and 21 b provided on the upper portion of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (refer to an LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect.

  The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in an LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal 13 includes a symbol display area 4 and various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, and the like to be operated by the player. 17R, a settlement button (not shown), and the like.

  The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps with the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position closer to the player than the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. 3L, 3C, 3R has a size that enables visual recognition. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and is configured so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, the reel display window 4 is continuously arranged among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel. Two symbols are displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, one symbol (three in total) is placed in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns). In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (center line) connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the reel display window 4, It is defined as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The reel display window 4 is formed by an opening of a frame member 31 provided on the pedestal portion 13. A substantially horizontal plane base region is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, a medal slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and a MAX bet button 15a and a 1 bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

  The medal slot 14 is provided to accept a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 14 are used for one game up to a predetermined number (for example, three) set in advance, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number are deposited inside the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

  The MAX bet button 15a and the 1 bet button 15b are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited in the cabinet 2a. Note that a bet button LED (not shown) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided inside the MAX bet button 15a. The checkout button is provided to draw out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

  When the player depresses the MAX bet button 15a, medals corresponding to the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the active line is activated.

  Hereinafter, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1 bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 14 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are all referred to as “insertion operation”.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  In addition, an information display 6 is provided in the approximate center of the pedestal region on a substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

  The information display 6 has a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as “paid-out number”). (Hereinafter referred to as “7-segment LED”) and information such as the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as “credit number”) for digital display (notification) to the player A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In this embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information about the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of paid-out medals is switched from the display mode of the paid-out number to the display mode of the error type information.

  Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on a stop operation necessary for displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. The instruction monitor informs the player of necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the 2-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. To do.

  As shown in FIG. 6 to be described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via a door relay terminal board 68 and a game operation display board 81. Control is performed by a later-described main control circuit 90 in the control board 71. Moreover, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, a configuration for notifying the stop operation information using other means controlled by the sub control board 72 is provided. Specifically, information on a stop operation is notified by a display device 11 described later configured by a projector mechanism 211 and a display unit 212 (see FIG. 3 and FIG. 6 described later).

  When such a configuration is applied, the notification mode in the instruction monitor and the notification mode in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information on the stop operation directly (for example, the numerical value “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if is displayed, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be specified depending on the player, which is not a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value “1” that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11) displays the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 configured as described above, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. In addition, the presence / absence of notification of such stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, the stop operation information may be notified in the later-described ART game state (see FIG. 15 described later) without notifying the stop operation information in the later-described general gaming state (non-ART game state).

  Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially vertically from a pedestal region in a substantially horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 13 in the front surface portion of the door body 9. The sub display device 18 includes a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various types of information.

  A touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as a capacitance method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a function that allows the display of the sub display device 18 to be switched in accordance with the player's operation received via the touch sensor 19 (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19). Have The sub display device 18 is controlled by a later-described sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

  In the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout opening 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout port 24 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51 described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. Sounds such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the effects are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

  In addition, a data display device 100 is arranged on the upper portion of the exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot 1. The data display device 100 receives various signals transmitted from the main control board 71 and performs display / production display of various contents accordingly.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the back side of the front door 2b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a includes a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. And the display apparatus 11 is arrange | positioned in the upper part in the cabinet 2a.

  The display device 11 includes a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projection member 212a onto which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, in the display device 11, image light is generated based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projection member 212a that is a three-dimensional object, and the image light is projected by the projector mechanism 211 to the projection member. Projected onto the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, an advanced and powerful effect can be performed. Although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member with a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212 a, and either one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. Used as a screen on which image light is projected. Therefore, the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projection target member in accordance with the gaming state.

  In the lower part of the cabinet 2a, a medal payout device 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 can store a large amount of medals and can discharge them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button is pressed and settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  Further, a sub control board case 56 for accommodating a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is disposed above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a. A sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 10 described later), which will be described later, is mounted on the sub control board 72 accommodated in the sub control board case 56. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 200 will be described later.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed above the sub control board case 56 in the cabinet 2a. The sub relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub control board 72 and a main control board 71 described later is mounted. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72, a board disposed around the sub-control board 72, various devices (units), and the like is mounted.

  In addition, an external concentrated terminal plate case 46 for accommodating the external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed above the medal auxiliary storage 52 in the cabinet 2a. The external concentration terminal board 47 is a board provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, a security signal, and a signal indicating role information to the outside of the pachislot machine 1 and is simply referred to as an external terminal board. Sometimes it is done.

  Although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is disposed in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). Is a relay board on which wiring for connecting is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is disposed at the center of the rear side of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and main control is performed on the opposite side of the middle door 41 from the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 in which a board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  Further, the main control board case 55 is made of a permeable member, and when the front door 2b is in an open state, the role monitor 95 (ratio display means) can be visually recognized as shown in FIG. The role ratio monitor is configured to display predetermined ratio information. The role ratio monitor 95 will be described in detail later.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 7 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. . In the present embodiment, for example, control such as lottery processing for determining whether ART is determined, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, display processing of ratio information on the role monitor 95, and the like are also performed. This is performed by the main control circuit 90. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

  Speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41 on the back side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are disposed at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (game medium detecting means: not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is disposed diagonally to the left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed in the area where the front door 2 b is opened and closed by the middle door 41 on the back surface and below the reel display window 4 (see below). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 is mounted with wiring for connecting the main control board 71 in the main control board case 55 to each of various buttons and switches, the sub relay board 61, the selector 66, and the game operation display board 81. Relay board. Examples of the various buttons and switches include a MAX bet button 15a, a 1 bet button 15b, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Display example of sub display device>
Here, various display screens displayed on the sub display device 18 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5E. 5A is a diagram showing a top screen 221 displayed on the sub display device 18, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a menu screen 222 displayed on the sub display device 18. 5C to 5E are diagrams showing game information screens 223, 224, and 225 displayed on the sub display device 18. FIG.

  Various display screens are displayed on the sub display device 18 by a player's touch operation. As shown in FIGS. 5A to 5E, various display screens including a top screen 221, a menu screen 222, and game information screens 223, 224, and 225 are displayed. The display screen is displayed. These display screens are switched based on the player's operation signal received via the touch sensor 19.

  The top screen 221 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the sub display device 18, and on the top screen 221, a “MENU” button 221a and a summary game history 221b are displayed. The “MENU” button 221a is an operation button for calling the menu screen 222 shown in FIG. 5B. When a predetermined operation (for example, tapping) is performed by the player on the “MENU” button 221a, the menu screen 222 is called. It is. On the top screen 221, a part of the game history (outline game history) of the pachislot 1 is displayed as the summary game history 221b. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) are displayed as the summary game history 221b.

  The menu screen 222 is a screen that displays a menu that can be displayed on the sub display device 18. In the menu screen 222, a "return" button 222a, a "registration" button 222b, an "explanation" button 222c, and an "array payout" button 222d. , A “reach eye” button 222e, a “WEB site” button 222f, and a “volume” button 222g are displayed. The “return” button 222a is an operation button for calling the top screen 221. When the player performs an operation on the “return” button 222a, the top screen 221 is called. The “Register” button 222b to “Volume” button 222g are operation buttons for calling up the display screen of the corresponding menu contents. When the player performs an operation on each button, the corresponding menu contents are displayed. The display screen is called up.

  Since the sub display device 18 is provided separately from the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212) described above, it can be controlled separately from the display device 11. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display screen of the sub display device 18 can be switched by the player's operation even during the game (during execution of the effect by the display device 11). As a result, for example, when the player wants to know the character appearing in the presentation on the display device 11, the player operates the “explain” button 222 c to call the explanation screen, thereby It is possible to grasp information such as the relationship of the game during the game. Also, for example, if a player wants to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guideline for winning a rare role during reel rotation when a so-called `` rare role '' is won during a game, By operating the “array payout” button 222d to call the array payout screen, the reel arrangement can be grasped.

  The game information screens 223, 224, and 225 are display screens that display detailed game history information including a summary game history displayed on the top screen 221 of the game history of the pachislot 1.

  On the game information screen 223, a “return” button 223a, a “MENU” button 223b, a “previous” button 223c, a “next” button 223d, and a game history 223e are displayed. The “return” button 223a and the “MENU” button 223b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively. The display screen to be called is called. The “Previous” button 223c and the “Next” button 223d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order. When the “Previous” button 223c is operated by the player, the display screen Is switched from the game information screen 223 to the game information screen 225, and when the “next” button 223d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 223 to the game information screen 224. As the game history 223e, as shown in FIG. 5C, the number of games (number of games), the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of CZ (chance zone) are displayed.

  On the game information screen 224, a “return” button 224a, a “MENU” button 224b, a “previous” button 224c, a “next” button 224d, and a game history 214e are displayed. The “return” button 224a and the “MENU” button 224b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively. The display screen to be called is called. The “Previous” button 224c and the “Next” button 224d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order. When the “Previous” button 224c is operated by the player, the display screen is changed to the game. When the information screen 224 is switched to the game information screen 223 and the “next” button 224 d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 224 to the game information screen 225. Further, as the game history 224e, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ (chance zone) described later are displayed. As will be described later, in this embodiment, three types of CZs CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZ. Therefore, as the game history 224e, as shown in FIG. 5D, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to CZ3 are displayed.

  On the game information screen 225, a “return” button 225a, a “MENU” button 225b, a “previous” button 225c, a “next” button 225d, and a game history 225e are displayed. The “return” button 225a and the “MENU” button 225b are operation buttons for calling the top screen 221 and the menu screen 222 to the display screen of the sub display device 18, respectively. The display screen to be called is called. The “Previous” button 225c and the “Next” button 225d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order. When the “Previous” button 225c is operated by the player, the display screen is displayed. Is switched from the game information screen 225 to the game information screen 224, and when the “next” button 225d is operated by the player, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 225 to the game information screen 223. Further, as the game history 225e, as shown in FIG. 5E, the number of wins of the small combination and the winning probability (the fraction in which the numerator is 1) are displayed.

  In addition, as a switching method of the display screen displayed on the sub display device 18, for example, a switching method based on a tap operation on an operation button displayed on each display screen may be employed. You may employ | adopt the method of switching based on the swipe operation with respect to a display screen.

<Control system for pachislot>
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot 1.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. The pachi-slot 1 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot 1 includes an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. In addition, since the structure of the hopper apparatus 51 was mentioned above, the description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal board 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The setting key type switch 54 is provided on the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachislot 1 or when checking the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The cabinet side relay board 44 is a relay on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the game medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. It is a substrate.

  A data display device 300 is connected to the external concentration terminal board 47, and a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal are transmitted to the data display device 300. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, for example, a BLE (Bluetooth (registered trademark) Low Energy) module is disposed on the substrate of the external concentration terminal board 47. The BLE module receives role ratio information and information related to the role ratio expression from the main control board 71, and controls such information to be transmitted to the outside by a beacon signal according to the BLE standard. Such a beacon signal basically realizes unidirectional communication (unidirectional communication), and communication can be performed without pairing depending on the security level.

  The game medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52 and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot 1.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot 1. The power supply board 53 b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44 and also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 68, a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a checkout switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a sub-relay board 61. Since the selector 66, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The BET switch 77 (insertion operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1 bet button 15b has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that a settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable main reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each stop button 17L, 17C, 17R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 includes, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter referred to as “first LED” to “first LED”) that are turned on in correspondence with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as “inserted number”). LED for lighting a medal insertion mark, a game start mark, a replay mark, etc. based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81) Etc. are included. In the first to third LEDs (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED is turned on, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs are turned on, and three medals (game) When the startable number of sheets is inserted, the first to third LEDs are turned on. Since the information display device 6 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. The pachislot machine 1 includes a speaker group 84, LED groups 85, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19, and a display unit 212, which are connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10 and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores opening / closing history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projection target 212a constituting the display device 11, and another projection target with a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projection target 212a.

  The pachi-slot 1 also includes a ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, production images (video), sound (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. . The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72, the projector mechanism 211 constituting the display device 11, and the sub display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachi-slot 1.

  The main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role monitor 95 (ratio display means).

  The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for gaming machines. In the microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment, as will be described later, various instruction codes specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be defined in the source program (for example, “LDQ” instruction described later, etc., hereinafter: “main CPU 101” A dedicated instruction code). In this embodiment, by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101, the processing efficiency and the program capacity are reduced. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 9 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by a main control circuit described later. To do.

  The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

  The power management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). The power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the “XSRST” terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the startup voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), a power interruption detection signal is output to the “XINT” terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal (start signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means to output (power failure means).

  The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (DC power supply voltage of 5 V DC) for the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

<Composition of ratio monitor>
Next, the configuration of the role ratio monitor 95 (see FIGS. 4 and 7) connected to the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the role ratio monitor 95. As shown in the configuration example of FIG. 8, the role ratio monitor 95 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. 107 performs a predetermined ratio calculation and displays the result of the ratio calculation as ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed as the predetermined ratio calculation (see FIGS. 27 to 35 described later), and the role ratio monitor 95 sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results. (See FIGS. 37 to 39 described later).

  Note that “abbreviation” that is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor 95, and “ratio” that is the ratio information corresponding to the type information is displayed in the lower two digits. Is displayed. For example, “7” is displayed in the first digit (abbreviation 10) of the role ratio monitor 95 and “U” is displayed in the second digit (abbreviation 1) (that is, the abbreviation “7U”). ”Is displayed), the ART function occupying the predetermined total number of games (175000 times) is operated as the ratio information in the lower two digits of the ratio monitor 95 (that is, advantageous for the player). The ratio of the number of games (advantageous area ratio) of the advantageous area for which the procedure of the stop operation was notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, “1” is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10), and “0” is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1). Is displayed.

  Further, for example, when “6” is displayed in the first digit (abbreviation 10) of the role ratio monitor 95 and “Y” is displayed in the second digit (abbreviation 1) (that is, the abbreviation 10). When “6Y” is displayed), in the lower two digits of the hand ratio monitor 95, as the ratio information, the hand that occupies the payout number of game media paid out among the specific total number of games (6000 times) Object continuous operation device (in this embodiment, BB. In addition, in the case where an accessory continuous operation device (MB) in which the second type special accessory (CB) operates continuously is included, the same applies hereinafter. ) Is activated and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium time linkage ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time linkage ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10), and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1). Is displayed.

  Further, for example, when “7” is displayed in the first digit (abbreviation 10) of the role ratio monitor 95 and “Y” is displayed in the second digit (abbreviation 1) (ie, abbreviation 10). When “7Y” is displayed), the lower two digits of the ratio monitor 95 occupy all of the payout number of game media paid out between a specific total number of games (6000) as ratio information. (In this embodiment, BB. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first type special combination (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second type special combination (CB) is The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out when the ordinary game (SB) is loaded, including all of them, the same applies hereinafter) Property ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time feature ratio is 59%, “5” is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10), and “9” is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1). Is displayed.

  Further, for example, when “6” is displayed in the first digit (abbreviation 10) of the role ratio monitor 95 and “A” is displayed in the second digit (abbreviation 1) (that is, the abbreviation 10). When “6A” is displayed), in the lower two digits of the hand ratio monitor 95, the ratio information occupies the payout number of game media paid out for a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio (total combination ratio) of the number of game media paid out by operating the continuous object operation device is displayed. Specifically, when the total combined ratio is 25%, “2” is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10), and “5” is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1). Is displayed.

  Further, for example, when “7” is displayed in the first digit (abbreviation 10) of the role ratio monitor 95 and “A” is displayed in the second digit (abbreviation 1) (that is, the abbreviation 10). When “7A” is displayed), the lower two digits of the ratio monitor 95 occupy all of the payout number of game media paid out for a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) as ratio information. The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out when the combination is activated (total combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the ratio of total assets is 25%, “2” is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10), and “5” is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1). Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 has been described by taking as an example a configuration in which the role ratio monitor 95 is directly provided. However, the display content of the role ratio monitor 95 is controlled by the main control circuit 90. In addition, it is sufficient if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly include can be adopted. For example, the role monitor 95 may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display contents via the game operation display board 81. In this case, the role ratio monitor 95 is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and predetermined ratio information is displayed using one or more of them. You may make it do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor 95, an advantageous section ratio, a medium time combination ratio, a medium time combination ratio, a total combination ratio, and a total combination ratio are exemplified. The ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of paid-out game media paid out by the ART function occupying the number of paid-out game media paid out during a predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio) The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium advantageous section acquisition ratio) The ratio of the number of games in which the consecutively-operated-acting device is activated (the medium-time continuous section ratio) occupies the specific total number of games (6000 times), and the specific total number of games (6000 times) The ratio of the number of games in which all the actors are activated (medium-time actor interval ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which the consecutively-actuated device is activated in the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total linked interval) Ratio), for a predetermined total number of games (175,000) Occupy all the character object is ratio of the number of game that activated (total character object section ratio) and the like can also be displayed by performing a predetermined ratio calculation.

  In the present embodiment, the predetermined total number of games is set to “175000 times” and the specific total number of games is set to “6000 times” as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor 95. Although described, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, among the various ratios described above, a predetermined total number of games may be set to “17500 times” and a specific total number of games may be set to “3000 times” as a parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of them. . However, since various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores and the optimal number of games may be different for the ratio calculation, the number of games for calculating the various ratios described above is as described above. It is not restricted to what was done and can be changed suitably. In this case, among the various ratios, the game store may arbitrarily set the number of games that can be used as a parameter (denominator) and a child (numerator) for calculating part or all of the ratios. Good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ART function operation is not included in all the target objects in the medium-time character ratio and the total character ratio. It is also possible to perform the ratio calculation of the medium-time functional ratio and the total functional ratio. Moreover, even if it is something other than the above, as long as it is useful information, it is needless to say that the ratio calculation can be performed by adding two values and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. Absent.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

  The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (first storage means), a main RAM 103 (second storage means), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, an arithmetic circuit 107, A random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, and a first serial communication circuit 114 are included. These units constituting the microprocessor 91 are connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

  The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 and performs control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

  The main CPU 101 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. The reel index includes, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position of each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each main reel. It is detected by a provided reel position detector (not shown).

  Here, management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is incremented by one. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, each reel) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected to the microprocessor 91. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 includes, for example, a frequency divider (not shown) and the like, and the clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is received by other components (for example, the timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. Note that the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

  The reset controller 106 resets an IAT (Illegal Address Trap) or WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a “MUL (multiplication)” instruction, which will be described later, on the source program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on the “MUL” instruction.

  The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 generates a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard latch random number, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining a 2-byte soft latch random number, and a 1-byte soft latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from a predetermined range of random numbers generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) for signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, the power management circuit 93) provided outside the microprocessor 91. . The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is connected to one of the input ports PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and the latch signal is sent from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at a timing (on edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. Is output. In the random number circuit 110, when the latch signal is input, the random number register 0 is latched, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

  The interrupt controller 112 performs an interrupt process by the main CPU 101 based on a power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a time-out signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Control the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93 or a time-out signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. Based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to the time-out signal from the timer circuit 113, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing, reel control processing, communication data transmission processing, 7-segment LED drive processing, timer Various interrupt processes such as an update process (see FIG. 36 described later) are performed.

  The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)). Count elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

  The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the sub control circuit 200 (sub control means) mounted on the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub control circuit 200 of the pachislot 1.

  The sub control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub control circuit 200 basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

  The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay substrate 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay substrate 87.

  The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  In the program storage area, a control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored. For example, in the control program, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90 and a random number value for production are extracted, and production registration for determining and registering production contents (production data). Various programs for executing tasks are included. In addition, the control program includes a drawing control task for controlling the display of video by the display device 11 based on the determined content of the presentation, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light from a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84 Various programs for executing a voice control task or the like for controlling the output of the program are also included.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Further, the data storage area includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

  The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and display the created video on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and / Or display on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub control board 72.

  Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
Next, a connection form between the main control circuit 90 and the BLE module 49 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 90 and the BLE module 49. As shown in FIG. 6, a cabinet-side relay board 44 is interposed between the main control board 71 including the main control circuit 90 and the external concentrated terminal board 47 including the BLE module 49, but is omitted here. To do.

  In FIG. 11, the main control circuit 90 includes a microprocessor 91 (main CPU 101) and a role ratio monitor 95, where the role ratio monitor 95 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 91 transmits role ratio information (output data for a 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the role-ratio monitor 95, the role-ratio monitor 95 turns on the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. The role ratio information is displayed.

  A relay circuit 48 and a BLE module 49 are mounted on the board of the external concentration terminal board 47, and the microprocessor 91 receives a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and When one medal is paid out, one signal is sent to the external data display device 300 connected to the external concentration terminal board 47 via the relay circuit 48. The

  The microprocessor 91 also transmits a gaming machine ID and role ratio information to the BLE module 49. The BLE module 49 includes a CPU 49a, a ROM 49b, a RAM 49c, and a BLE chip 49d. Based on the program stored in the ROM 49b, the CPU 49a controls the BLE chip 49d when data (game machine ID and role ratio information) is received from the microprocessor 91, and these received data are transferred to the BLE standard. A beacon signal is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 49d. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 49d can be received by a portable device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via the wireless communication network.

  In the example of FIG. 11, the microprocessor 91 is configured to be directly connected to the BLE module 49 of the external concentration terminal board 47 by a cable. However, the microprocessor 91 is provided by the microprocessor 91 in various other connection forms. The gaming machine ID and role ratio information are transmitted to the CPU 49a of the BLE module 49. For example, as indicated by a dotted arrow in FIG. 11, the gaming machine ID and the role ratio information are obtained by a route using a part of the signal line connecting the microprocessor 91 and the relay circuit 48 of the external concentration terminal board 47. Can be transmitted from the microprocessor 91 to the CPU 49a.

  Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify gaming machines such as pachislot 1 (at least individually in a hall store), and is stored in advance in a program area or a data area of the main ROM 102 described later, for example. It is what has been. The gaming machine ID may be an ID set in association with the gaming machine, or may be an ID associated with the microprocessor 91, the main CPU 101, or the like.

  As the gaming machine ID, for example, the “chip individual number” of the main CPU 101 can be assigned. The “chip individual number” is a number of 4 bytes (0 to 4,294,967,295) different for each chip, which is assigned at the time of chip manufacture. Since this number is different for each shipped gaming machine, it can be used as a gaming machine ID.

  Further, as the gaming machine ID, for example, an ID stored in a predetermined storage area or the like in the ROM 49b of the BLE module 49, the BLE chip 49d, or the external concentration terminal board 47 can be used as a gaming machine or a factory. It can also be used by being tied. The external concentration terminal board 47 on which the BLE module 49 is mounted is attached to the pachislot 1 in a replaceable manner. The predetermined identifier stored in the BLE module 49 is stored in the external concentration terminal board 47. In the case of incorporation or replacement, the predetermined identifier can be used as a gaming machine ID by managing so as to be stored in association with the corresponding gaming machine.

  The power supply for the external concentration terminal board 47 is provided from the main control circuit 90, for example. In addition, a standby power supply can be installed on the external concentrated terminal board 47. For example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be employed as the RAM 49c of the BLE module 49.

  In the external concentration terminal board 47 of this embodiment, as described above, game information (medal insertion signal and medal payout signal) provided from the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) is displayed as data by relay contact output. Although configured to be transmitted to the device 300, at least a part of the game information and the data (game machine ID and role ratio information) is transferred from the external concentration terminal board 47 to a hall computer 1200 and a sand device 1370 to be described later. The data display device 1350 can be configured to transmit to other peripheral devices (the same applies to the external concentration terminal plates 447 and 547 described later).

<Configuration of data display device>
Next, the configuration of the data display device 300 connected to the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a circuit block diagram showing a configuration of the data display device 300.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the data display device 300 is disposed on the exterior body 2. The data display device 300 is configured to display various game information based on the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal received from the main CPU 101, as well as effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the data display device 300 includes a CPU 301, a ROM 302, a RAM 303, a touch panel driver 304, and a display device (touch panel) 305.

  In accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the CPU 301 controls image display relating to effect display and display of game information according to a control program stored in the ROM 302. The ROM 302 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  The program storage area stores a control program executed by the CPU 301. For example, the control program includes a communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 90, a display control task for controlling display of effects and display of game information, and the like.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting the effect display, a storage area for storing game data related to game information, and the like.

  The RAM 303 is provided with a storage area for registering data related to effect display and data related to game information and a storage area for storing various data such as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

  The display device (touch panel) 305 is a liquid crystal display panel provided with a touch sensor. For example, an effect display area for effect display and a game information display area for displaying game information are provided. Further, the player can give an instruction such as switching the display device of the display device 305 using the touch panel.

  The touch panel driver 304 controls the display device 305 to generate an image based on the data related to the effect display and the data related to the game information, and controls the display device 305 to display the generated image. The designated content is transmitted to the CPU 301.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, an internal configuration of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 (hereinafter referred to as “memory map”) included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13A to 13C. 13A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 13C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

  In the memory map of the entire memory provided in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 13A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, The XCS decode areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

  In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 13B, from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102, there are a program area, a data area, an unspecified area, a trademark recording area, a program management area, and a security setting area. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

  In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to game playability performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, various sub-control circuits 200, etc.) in various control processes related to game playability performed by the player. Data for transmitting a control command (command), etc.) are stored. In other words, the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of a program area and a data area is necessary for control processing (game-related processing) related to game playability actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

  The non-regulated area stores control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect the game characteristics) that are not directly related to the game performance of the game executed by the player. For example, the program and data used in the Pachislot 1 certification test (trial test), the control program and data used in the checksum generation process at power interruption and the sum check process at power recovery, and the ratio monitor display switching The control program and data used in the processing, the ratio monitor aggregation process, etc., the anti-fraud program, the data necessary for it, and the like are stored in an unspecified area.

  In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 13C, from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103, a gaming RAM area (predetermined storage area, gaming temporary storage area) and an unspecified RAM area (unspecified temporary area). Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

  The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by the execution of a control program related to the game performance of the game executed by the player. . Each of the various data is stored in a work area at a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

  In addition, the non-specified RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the game performance of the game executed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, various processes that are not directly related to the game playability of the game executed by the player, such as a sum check process, are executed using the non-regulated RAM area.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the game performance of the game performed by the player are stored in the main ROM 102. The data is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) arranged at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to game playability performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an unspecified RAM area that is arranged at an address different from the game RAM area. .

  In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data that are not necessary for the game itself actually played by the player are placed in the ROM area (non-specified ROM area) where it is impossible to place a program or the like according to the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in this embodiment, compression of the capacity of the game ROM area can be avoided.

<Game state transition flow>
Next, various game states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot 1 of this embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachislot 1, and FIG. 14B is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the gaming state. FIG. 15A is a game state transition flow diagram that considers whether or not the notification (ART) function is activated, and FIG. 15B is a table that summarizes the game state transition conditions.

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) is provided as a type of bonus game. BB is an accessory continuous operation device related to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first type special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on whether or not the bonus combination is won / actuated (winning). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the main control circuit 90 determines whether or not a bonus combination (internal winning combination of names “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” described later) is won / actuated (winning). Three types of gaming states called “bonus non-winning state”, “inter-flag state” and “bonus state” are managed.

  Note that the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is non-winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state where the bonus is activated. In this embodiment, when a bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won is generated. The inter-flag state is a state where the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state where the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

  Whether the bonus combination is won or not is managed based on data stored in a hit request flag storage area and a carryover combination storage area, which will be described later, provided in the main RAM 103. Further, whether or not a bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 103.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, in the gaming state where the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other. Six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “RT0 state” to “RT5 state”, respectively), are provided. The RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT5 state are gaming states in which the probability that a replay role is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 state has a medium probability that a replay role is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a gaming state with a medium probability. The RT3 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is one of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is further based on the type of internal winning combination related to replay and its winning probability in a gaming state where the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state). Thus, six types of states from the RT1 state to the RT5 state are also managed.

  Note that the RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on data stored in a game state flag storage area (to be described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, five flags indicating the RT state of the RT1 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the on / off state of these flags is managed by the main RAM 103, thereby the RT state. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is in the on state as the current RT state. When all the RT state flags are in the off state, the main control circuit 90 specifies that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

  As shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B, when a bonus combination (an internal winning combination with names “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” described later) is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state (when the transition condition (1) is satisfied). ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. When the bonus combination wins in the inter-flag state (when the transition condition (2) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

  Further, when medals exceeding the prescribed number (216) are paid out in the bonus state and the bonus state is terminated (when the transition condition (3) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 state ( Shift to bonus non-winning state).

  When 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 state (when the transition condition (4) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT0 state. In the RT1 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “bell spilled eyes” is displayed on the active line before 20 games have elapsed (when the transition condition (5) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 The gaming state is shifted from the RT1 state to the RT2 state.

  In the RT0 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “bell spill” is displayed on the active line (when the transition condition (5) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT2 state. Let When the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “RT3 transition lip” is displayed on the active line in the RT2 state (when the transition condition (6) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Let

  When the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “RT4 transition lip” is displayed on the active line in the RT3 state (when the transition condition (7) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 transitions the gaming state from the RT3 state to the RT4 state. Let Further, in the RT3 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “bell spill” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed on the active line (when the transition condition (8) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. The gaming state is shifted from the RT3 state to the RT2 state. Furthermore, in the RT4 state, when the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “bell spill” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed on the active line (when the transition condition (8) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 The gaming state is shifted from the RT4 state to the RT2 state.

  As for the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “bell spilled eyes”, an internal winning combination (small role) related to the name “F_3 selection bell_1st”, “F_3 selection bell_2nd” or “F_3 selection bell_2rd” described later is determined, And it is a combination of symbols displayed when the order of the stop operation is incorrect with respect to the pressing order determined for each type of the small role. For the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “RT2 transition lip”, an internal winning combination (replay combination) related to a name “F_maintenance lip_1st”, “F_maintenance lip_2nd” or “F_maintenance lip_3rd” described later is determined, and This is a combination of symbols displayed when the order of the stop operation is incorrect for the pressing order determined for each type of the replay combination.

  For the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “RT3 transition Lip”, an internal winning combination (replay combination) related to the names “F_RT3 Lip_1st”, “F_RT3 Lip_213”, “F_RT3 Lip_231” or “F_RT3 Lip_3rd” described later is determined. And the combination of symbols displayed when the order of the stop operation is correct with respect to the pressing order determined for each type of the replay combination. In addition, the symbol combination related to the abbreviation “RT4 transition Lip” has an internal winning combination (replay combination) related to the names “F_RT4 Lip_123”, “F_RT4 Lip_132”, “F_RT4 Lip_2nd”, or “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” described later. This is a combination of symbols that is displayed when the order of stop operations is determined and is correct with respect to the pressing order determined for each type of replay combination.

[Game State Transition Flow Considering Operation of Notification (ART) Function]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not to activate a function (ART function) that notifies a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the bonus inactive state, the operating / inactive state of the ART function is also managed as a gaming state.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 separates the “general gaming state” and the “ART gaming state” based on the presence or absence of notification (ART) in the non-bonus operating state. To manage as a gaming state. That is, in the management of the gaming state in consideration of the presence / absence of notification (ART), as shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 categorizes the “bonus state”, “general gaming state”, and “ART gaming state” as broad categories. 3 types of gaming state are managed.

  Note that the general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state for the player. Further, the general gaming state is one of the RT0 to RT4 states, and is an ART non-winning gaming state.

  On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. Further, the ART gaming state is basically a RT4 state and a gaming state in which the ART is won. In this embodiment, when the RT state transitions to the RT4 state after winning the ART, the ART game is started.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, two types of states called “normal game state” and “CZ (chance zone)” are provided as the general game state.

  The normal game state is the most unfavorable game state for the player, but in the game in the normal game state, a lottery to shift to CZ is performed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game in the normal game state, when the winning lottery to CZ is won (when the transfer condition (A) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state to the normal game state. To CZ.

  CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with high expectation for the transition to the ART gaming state, and a lottery for transitioning to the ART is performed in the game in the CZ. Then, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game during CZ, when the lottery for shifting to ART is not won (when the transition condition (B) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state. , Transition from the CZ to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in a game during CZ, when winning a lottery for shifting to ART (when the transition condition (C) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the ART gaming state. At this time, although not shown in FIG. 15A, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the ART gaming state (described later, normal ART or CT) via the ART preparation state described later.

  As described above, the ART gaming state is started when the RT state shifts to the RT4 state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 14A, since the RT4 state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 state via the RT3 state, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART is won. Therefore, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state during the period from the winning of the ART to the transition of the RT state to the RT4 state is set to the ART ready state. In this ART ready state game, information on a stop operation necessary to shift the RT state to the RT4 state is notified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15A, two types of states called “normal ART” and “CT (additional chance)”, which are different in game playability, are provided as the ART gaming state.

  The normal ART is a stop operation that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined number of games (for example, a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination with a large number of medals to be paid out or a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 state). Is a gaming state in which is notified. Further, in a game during normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed.

  CT is a gaming state in which a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and it is possible to add a normal ART continuation period for a specific period (one set of eight games), and functions as an extra chance zone It is a gaming state to be Also, during CT, a game is usually played without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a game during a normal ART, when winning a lottery for transition to CT (when the transition condition (D) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from normal ART to CT. Transition game state. In the normal ART, when the duration of the normal ART ends (when the transition condition (E) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the normal ART to the general game state (normal game state or CZ). Transition. In this embodiment, the duration of the normal ART is managed by the number of games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the management method of the duration of the normal ART is arbitrary. For example, the duration of normal ART may be managed based on the number of medals paid out during normal ART or the number of differences, or depending on the number of times of notification (number of navigations) affecting medal payout during normal ART. May be managed.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the game during CT, when the duration of CT (one set of 8 games) ends (when the transition condition (F) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to CT. To normal ART.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, when a bonus combination is won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) or the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) (the transition condition (2) described in FIGS. 14A and 14B). When established, the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state.

  In the game in the bonus state, as described above, the lottery for the transition to ART is performed. In the game in the bonus state, when the lottery for transition to the ART is non-winning (when the transition condition (G) is satisfied) The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). However, if the ART game state (normal ART or CT) has shifted to the bonus state, the main control circuit 90 will change the game state, Transition from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). On the other hand, in the bonus state game, when the lottery for transition to ART is won (when the transition condition (H) is satisfied), the main control circuit 90 changes the game state from the bonus state to the ART game state (normal ART or CT). Transition. As described above, since the RT state shifts to the RT1 state at the end of the bonus state, when the gaming state is shifted from the bonus state to the ART gaming state, the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the ART state. A transition is made to the ART gaming state via the preparation state.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of the main data table stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 16) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as “0”. In each reel, the symbol counter value “0” corresponds to the value of the symbol counter in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (the direction from symbol position “19” in FIG. 16 toward symbol position “0”). “0” to “19” are assigned to the symbols as symbol positions.

  That is, by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of design. In this embodiment, the symbols “white 7”, “blue 7”, “top 1”, “top 2”, “bottom”, “replay”, “hat”, “cactus 1”, Ten kinds of symbols “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” are used.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, for example, the symbol “white 7” (symbol code 1) is assigned “00000001” as data, and the symbol “blue 7” (symbol code 2) is assigned. Is assigned “00000010” as data. The symbol “Chile top 1” (symbol code 3) is assigned “00000011” as data, and the symbol “Chile above 2” (symbol code 4) is assigned “00000100” as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table (not shown) referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and lottery values when each internal winning combination is determined. Note that the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of internal winnings such as a bonus combination and a small combination set in advance. This setting is changed using, for example, the reset switch 76 and the setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 6).

  In the internal lottery process of this embodiment, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) by the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 is assigned to each internal winning combination. Sequentially add with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result has overflowed). When the lottery result exceeds 65535 in a predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination is won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example of performing lottery by adding a lottery value to an extracted random number value has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value, It may be determined whether the subtraction result (lottery result) has fallen below “0” (whether the lottery result has underflowed) or not to determine whether the internal lottery is won or not.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the probability of being determined is higher for an internal winning combination having a larger numerical value defined as a lottery value. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by “the lottery value specified for each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type and winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination change according to the RT state type. For example, the replay combination relating to the names “F_Chill Lip (No. 25)” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D (No. 31)” is not determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state to the RT3 state, but in the RT4 state. Only determined as an internal winning combination.

[Design combination determination table]
Next, a correspondence table (symbol combination determination table (not shown)) between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations will be described. The symbol combination determination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations (combinations) that can be displayed on the effective line (center line) associated with each internal winning combination. That is, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be displayed on the active line (the type of display combination that can win a prize) is uniquely determined.

  Various data described in the symbol combination column in each symbol combination determination table is for identifying symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed along the effective lines set over the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. It is data.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 using a program will be described.

[Processing at power-on (reset interrupt)]
First, the process at the time of power-on (reset interrupt) of the pachislot 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing at power-on (reset interrupt). The power-on (reset interrupt) process shown in FIG. 17 is performed when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 is started. This is executed based on an interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power monitoring port (power monitoring means) is in an on state (S1).

  In S1, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power monitoring port is on (when S1 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S1. Here, the power monitoring port being in the ON state is a state where the power supply voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main CPU 101 is not stable.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S1 that the power monitoring port is not in the ON state (when S1 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S2). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets a division ratio in a timer prescaler register (not shown), sets an interrupt enable setting in the timer control register (not shown), and sets a timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) for the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200 (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S4). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test on the main RAM 103 (S5).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed as a result of the writing test (S6).

  In S6, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when S6 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S6 that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (when S6 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. Is acquired (S7).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the generation timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S8). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether 1.1172 ms has elapsed since the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

  In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. Thereafter, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading information in a timer control register (not shown). In this embodiment, a bit (determination bit) that can determine (refer to) whether or not the current state is the generation timing of an interrupt process (whether or not it is a timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

  Therefore, in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 reads information in the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S8, the main CPU 101 turns on / off the discrimination bit in the timer control register ( By referring to “1” / “0”), it is determined whether or not the current state is the generation timing of the interrupt process. When 1.1172 ms elapses from the count start by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the determination bit is turned on.

  In S8, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the generation timing of the interrupt process (when S8 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S7 and repeats the processes after S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S8 that the current state is the generation timing of the interrupt process (when S8 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a sum check process (not specified) (S9). . In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a sum check process of the main RAM 103, and the work of this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 13C) in the main RAM 103. The program used in the sum check process is stored in an unspecified area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 13B).

  In S8, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the generation timing of the interrupt process (when S8 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the below-described interrupt before the process of S9. (See FIG. 36 described later). As a result of this interrupt processing, a no-operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72).

  After the process of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in an on state (S10).

  In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S10 that the setting key switch 54 is not in the ON state (when S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the sum check based on the result of the sum check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

  In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the sum check determination result is not normal (when S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S11 that the sum check determination result is normal (when S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the power interruption detection.

  When S6 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays a character string “rr” indicating an error occurrence on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clear process (S14).

  Here, returning to the process of S10 again, if S10 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a setting change command generation and storage process at the start of setting change.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address at the time of RAM abnormality or setting change start in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. The information up to the last address in the RAM area is erased (cleared). Then, after the process of S16, the main CPU 101 starts a main process described later (see FIG. 18 described later).

[Main processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) showing the procedure of the main process.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets an address at the time of the end of one game in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 13C as a start address for starting the initialization, and starts from the start address in the game RAM area. Erase (clear) information up to the last address. The storage area in this range is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs input check processing such as a medal sensor (not shown) and the start switch 79. Details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number acquisition processing (S203). In this processing, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 to be a hard latch random number) or a random number value for effects used in various lotteries related to ART ( 0 to 65535: each value of the random number registers 1 to 3 of the random number circuit 110 serving as a soft latch random number, 0 to 255: each value of the random number registers 4 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 serving as a soft latch random number) The various random numbers extracted are stored in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, generates an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), expands the hit request flag data, and stores the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. Etc. Details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by communication data transmission processing in interrupt processing described later with reference to FIG. Note that the start command includes a parameter (such as a subflag) that identifies an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs state-specific control processing (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a game start process (start process) according to the game state.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to a reel stop initial setting table (not shown), and acquires a drawing priority table selection table number, a drawing priority table number, and a stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the gaming state. And a process of storing “3” in the stop button non-operation counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 36, which will be described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, rotation of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R is started. Next, each reel is controlled to be accelerated until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start command generation / storage processing (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 and stores the command data in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by a communication data transmission process in an interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. The reel rotation start command includes a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has started.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs stop control of rotation of the corresponding reel based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores data in a symbol code storage area (not shown) in a winning action flag storage area (not shown). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a display combination is displayed on the active line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. Details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of display combination payouts determined in S214, and performs a medal payout process. Details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a role ratio monitor aggregation process (S217). Note that the role ratio monitor totaling process is stored in a non-standard area in the main ROM 102, and uses the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103 as a work area. In this process, the main CPU 101 aggregates various game information, performs a predetermined ratio calculation and stores ratio information when a specific ratio calculation condition is satisfied. Details of the role monitor totaling process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs RT check processing (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs CZ / ART termination processing (S220). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a CZ pull-back lottery process. Then, after the process of S220 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of medal acceptance / start check processing.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is “1” or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. The automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination relating to replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

  In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S221 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not “0” (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion processing (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, a medal insertion number LED lighting control process, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is “0” (S224).

  In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not “0” (when S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S222 and repeats the processes after S222.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S224 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is “0” (when S224 is YES), or when S221 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the medal auxiliary storage. A warehouse switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the game medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs role monitor display switching processing (S226). The role monitor display switching process is stored in an unspecified area in the main ROM 102, and uses the non-specified work area in the main RAM 103 as a work area. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of switching display / non-display of ratio information on the ratio monitor 95 based on whether a ratio non-display condition described later is satisfied. Details of the role ratio monitor display switching process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion state check processing (S227). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S228).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S228 that the medal can not be inserted (NO in S228), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S232 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S228 that the medal can be inserted (when S228 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S229). In this process, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal has passed normally, and credits the medal when a medal is inserted beyond a prescribed number. Perform processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines based on the result of the medal insertion check process whether the medal can be inserted or credited (S230).

  In S230, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal can be inserted or credited (when S230 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S232 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S230 that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (NO in S230), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S231). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 24.

  After S231, when S228 is NO or when S230 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the game start number (S232). In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is three.

  In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the game start possible number (when S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S235 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S232 that the current number of inserted medals is not the game start possible number (when S232 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are medals inserted (S233). ).

  In S233, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a medal insertion (when S233 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S233 that no medal has been inserted (when S233 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 17 (S234). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing for generating and storing a setting change command at the start of setting confirmation.

  After the process of S234 or when S232 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is on (S235).

  In S235, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when S235 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S235 that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when S235 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S236). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 24. After the process of S236, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S203 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Role monitor display switching process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the ratio monitor display switching process performed in S226 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the role ratio monitor display switching process. This process is configured as a process for using the non-standard work area in the main RAM 103 as a work area by a program stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role ratio display mode is waiting for completion (waiting for display end) (S2001). Note that the role ratio display mode is identification information for controlling the display state of the role ratio monitor 95 and identifies one of display (display on), non-display (display off), and waiting for completion (waiting for display completion). Information is stored in the main RAM 103. Thereby, the display state switching control of the role ratio monitor 95 is performed.

  In S2001, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio display mode is waiting for completion (waiting for display completion) (when S2001 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs processing of S2004 described later. On the other hand, in S2001, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio display mode is not waiting for completion (waiting for display completion) (when S2001 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a role non-display condition is satisfied. Is determined (S2002). The role ratio non-display condition is a condition set to hide the display state of the role ratio monitor 95 (display off). In the present embodiment, the role ratio non-display condition is set when the settlement switch 78 is on. This is established when the key switch 54 (setting switch) is turned on, when a medal is inserted, and when an error occurs. However, it is possible not to set the role ratio non-display condition, and it is also possible to adopt only one or a plurality of conditions among these conditions.

  In S2002, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio non-display condition is satisfied (when S2002 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S2004 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2002 that the role ratio non-display condition is not satisfied (when S2002 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on. (S2003). Here, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is on means that the front door 2b is in an open state, and the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is off means that the front door 2b is in a closed state.

  In S2003, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is not on (is off) (when S2003 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets display off in the role display mode (S2004). . After the process of S2004, the main CPU 101 ends the role monitor display switching process, and moves the process to S227 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 19).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2003 that the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is on (when S2003 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets display on in the role display mode (S2005). After the process of S2005, the main CPU 101 ends the role monitor display switching process, and moves the process to S227 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIG. 19).

  In the present embodiment, the role ratio monitor display switching process is performed as described above. That is, when the above-described role ratio non-display condition is satisfied, or when the front door 2b is in the closed state, the display state of the role ratio monitor 95 is switched to non-display (display off), and the above-described role combination is displayed. When the ratio non-display condition is not satisfied and the front door 2b is in the open state, the display state of the role ratio monitor 95 is switched to display (display on). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden related to the display of the ratio, and it is possible to extend the life of the device (role monitor 95) that displays the ratio. Moreover, since it is a holder of a door key (not shown) (for example, a store clerk of a game store, an inspector of a gaming machine, etc.) that can perform an unlocking operation on the lock 5 of the front door 2b, Since the display of the role ratio monitor 95 cannot be viewed by anyone other than the owner of the door key (not shown), the safety regarding the display of the ratio can be improved.

[Random number acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the random number acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a procedure of random number acquisition processing.

  First, the main CPU 101 acquires the hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery in the random value storage area (invalid) in the main RAM 103. (S291).

  Next, the main CPU 101 generates soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535: production random numbers used in ART-related lottery processing, and 0 to 255: 1 byte random processing). To set the soft latch random number acquisition register (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of acquired soft latch random numbers (for example, 7) (S293).

  Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the acquired number of soft latch random numbers at once and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random number (effect random number value, 2-byte random value) acquired from the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 is the hardware acquired from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random value storage area. It is stored in an area different from the area where the latch random number (random number value for internal winning combination lottery) is stored. Then, after the process of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number acquisition process, and moves the process to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 18). In this embodiment, in order to store four 2-byte random numbers and four 1-byte random numbers, a 12-byte storage area is allocated as a random number storage area in the main RAM 103.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a check process for the current game setting value (any one of 1 to 6) and the number of inserted medals (three in this embodiment).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games and the number of lotteries (53 times in this embodiment) (S302). In this process, the value of “special prize winning number + small bonus winning number” (winning request flag status) in the internal lottery table (for general games) is set in the C register, and “lottery value selection table or lottery coefficient table” (Determination data: data related to the address) is set in the A register. The winning request flag status is “25H” (hexadecimal number: 10) in the special prize winning number (“00H (out)”, “01H (BB1)”, “02H (BB2)”: decimal 0, 1, 2). The decimal number is a value obtained by multiplying a value obtained by multiplying 37 (a special prize number described later) by a small combination winning number (“00H” to “24H”: 0 to 36 in decimal).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is operating (S303). In S303, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RB is not operating (when S303 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S305 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is operating (when S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the internal lottery table for RB and the number of lotteries (in this embodiment, five times). Set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table and the number of lotteries for the general game set in S302 are overwritten with the internal lottery table for the RB and the number of lotteries.

  After the process of S304 or when S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data relating to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the determination data is RT state data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery target combination currently acquired is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address specified in the determination data of the lottery target combination that is currently acquired is an address in the RT state-specific lottery value selection table.

  In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not RT state data (when S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S306 that the determination data is the RT state data (when S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects the selected data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. And the acquired selection data is set as determination data (S307).

  After the processing of S307 or when S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether the determination data of the lottery target combination is data by setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery target combination currently acquired is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the main CPU 101, the address defined in the determination data of the lottery target combination currently acquired is an address in the 1-byte setting internal lottery value table or the 2-byte setting internal lottery value table. It is determined whether or not.

  In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S308 that the determination data is data by setting (when S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is data associated with the set value. However, the set value data “0” to “5” is not “the set value itself” but “ Data corresponding to “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  After the processing of S309 or when S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area where the lottery value of the lottery target role is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any one of 0 to 65535) for internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs lottery execution processing (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as a lottery result (winning / non-winning for the lottery target role). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (when overflowing), it is determined that the lottery target combination is won (the lottery target combination is determined as an internal winning combination). The

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a lottery execution process has been won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

  In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery execution process has been won (when S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table, and the winning request flag status (corresponding to the internal winning combination won) “Value of special prize winning number + small role winning number”) is acquired (S315). Then, after the process of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S314 that the main CPU 101 has not won the lottery execution process (when S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery object combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and lottery is performed. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (S317).

  In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lotteries after subtraction is not “0” (when S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S317 that the number of lotteries after subtraction is “0” (when S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the main CPU 101 The lose status is set (S318). Note that the “losing status” corresponds to a hit request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small bonus winning number are “0”. Then, after the process of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process and moves the process to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

  First, the main CPU 101 extracts a special prize winning number and a small bonus winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired in the internal lottery process, and the extracted special winning prize number and small bonus winning number are stored in the main RAM 103. It is stored in a winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a small combination is won based on the extracted small combination winning number (S322). In this process, when the small combination winning number is any one of 1 to 36, the main CPU 101 determines that the small combination winning number has been won, and when the small combination winning number is 0, the main CPU 101 It is determined that the small role did not win.

  In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that a small role is not won (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs processing of S331 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S322 that the small combination has been won (when S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small combination winning number as an initial value of the subtraction result (S323).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than “0” (S326).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is not less than “0” (when S326 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

  In the present embodiment, in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), blocks of hit request storage areas 0 to 7 and blocks of hit request storage areas 8 to 11 are provided. Therefore, the maximum value of the number of blocks in the storage area for the hit request flag data acquired in the bit number calculation process of S327 is “2”.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process in S328, the number of bytes of hit request flag data in block units defined in the hit request flag table is calculated.

  In addition, the process of S325-S328 mentioned above is repeated by the frequency | count of a small winning number.

  Here, returning to the process of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than “0” (when S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the hit request flag to be checked (updated) based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-described processing of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes of hit request flag data (on-bit information) in block units. Set only the storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs compressed data storage processing (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (developing) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated).

  After the process of S330 or when S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carryover combination storage area and determines whether there is a carryover combination (S331). When the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is a carryover combination (when S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S331 that there is no carryover combination (when S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 or BB2) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Is determined whether or not (S332).

  In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination is not won (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process, and the process proceeds to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 18). Move.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination is won in S332 (when S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning prize winning number in the carryover combination storage area (S333).

  After the processing of S333 or when S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the winning request flag data in the winning request flag storing area, and sets the RT state to RT5. The state is set, and the RT game number (the number of digested games in the RT1 state) is cleared (“0”) (S334). After the process of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process, and moves the process to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not “constant speed” has been reached) (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all the reels are not “constant speed” (when S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S712 that the rotation speeds of all the reels have become “constant speed” (when S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed. (S714).

  In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is not pressed (when S714 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S714. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S714 that a valid stop button has been pressed (when S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and sets the value of the stop button non-operation counter. 1 is subtracted (S715).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, an address (start address) setting process of the spinning cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop selection processing (S719). Although a detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs the number of sliding pieces selection process.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes symbol code storage processing (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the final stop (third stop) reel (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the final stop (third stop) reel based on the value of the stop button non-operating counter. When it is “0”, it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the final stop reel.

  In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the final stop reel (when S722 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a control change process (S723). In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the stop position is at a specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the pull-in priority storage process described in S212 of FIG. 18 (S724).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs standby interval remaining time standby processing (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a predetermined reel stop interval time has elapsed. After the process of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S712, and repeats the processes after S712.

  Here, the process returns to S722 again, and when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the final stop reel (when S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 energizes all reels. It is determined whether or not is in a stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all the reels is not stopped (when S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S726 that the excitation of all the reels is in a stopped state (when S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 remains in the on state in which the stop button operated for the third stop is on. It is determined whether or not (the stop button has not been released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button subjected to the third stop operation remains on (when S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S727 that the stop button for which the third stop operation has been performed is not in the on state (when S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. The process proceeds to S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Winning Search Process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure for winning search processing.

  First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area to the corresponding storage area of the winning action flag storage area (S761). At the end of this process, the last address of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (“5” in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

  Next, based on the address set in the HL register, the main CPU 101 sets data on the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, one, two, three, or nine) in the C register. The determination target data is set in the A register, and “2” is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). Hereinafter, the data “0” in the data “payout number (1, 2, 3, or 9) * 2 + 0” of the medal payout number set in the C register is referred to as “determination bit”. This determination bit is information indicating whether or not it is a determination target block for winning search.

  Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the medal payout number data set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the block is a determination target block based on the extracted determination bit value (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is “1”.

  In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not a determination target block (when S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S768 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S766 that the block is a determination target block (when S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning action flag storage area set in the DE register (- 1 update) (S767).

  After the process of S767 or when S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data in the storage area specified by the address of the winning action flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a win based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a win.

  In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a win (when S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S776 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S769 that the result of the determination is a win (when S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is three games (the number of medals bet is three). ) Is determined (S770).

  In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-game game (when S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S770 that the current game is not a three-game (when S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out a two-game (a game with two medal bets). The number of sheets (2 sheets) is set in the C register (S771).

  After the processing of S771 or when S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs payout number update processing (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the payout number of medals set in the C register to the current value of the winning number counter, and sets the value after the addition as the payout number.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number “10” (S773).

  In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the payout number is less than the maximum payout number “10” (when S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a process of S775 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S773 that the value of the payout number is not less than the maximum payout number “10” (when S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum payout number “10” as the payout number. (S774).

  After the processing of S774 or if S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

  After the processing of S775 or when S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another winning (S776). When the main CPU 101 determines that there is another winning in S776 (when S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S776 that there are no other winnings (when S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning search counter (-1 update) (S777). Note that when there is one active line as in the present embodiment, a plurality of small roles will not be won in duplicate, so the determination process in S776 is always NO.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is “0” (S778).

  In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not “0” (when S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S764 and repeats the processes after S764. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S778 that the value of the winning search counter is “0” (in the case where S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 18), the process proceeds to S215.

[Winning check / medal payout processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning check / medal payout process.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning action command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. The winning action command includes a parameter for specifying a winning action flag (display combination) and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data storage processing (S802). With this processing, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub-control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process in the interrupt process described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0” (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S803), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S217 in FIG.

  On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not “0” (NO in S803), the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits (stored number) of medals is the upper limit number (the number of books). It is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more in the embodiment (S804).

  In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of the medal is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the credit counter (+1 update) ( S805). The added credit counter value is displayed by a two-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medals have been paid out (S807). When the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has ended (when S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 18). The process proceeds to S217.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S807 that the payout of medals has not ended (when S807 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs payout interval waiting processing (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until a preset medal payout interval time (in this embodiment, 60.33 msec: 54 cycles of an interrupt process (1.1172 msec period) described later with reference to FIG. 36) elapses. Wait. After the process of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S803 and repeats the processes after S803.

  Here, returning to the processing of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits of medals is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (50) (when S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 A medal payout process is performed (S809). Through this process, one medal is paid out. After the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and moves the processing to S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Role monitor aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the ratio monitor aggregation process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the role ratio monitor totaling process. This process uses an unspecified work area (see FIG. 13C) in the main RAM 103 as a work area, and a program used in this process is stored in an unspecified area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 13B). .

  First, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section counting processing (S2011). In this process, the main CPU 101 totals necessary game information, and calculates the above-described advantageous section ratio based on the total result. Details of the advantageous section totaling process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number totaling process (S2012). In this process, the main CPU 101 totals necessary game information, and calculates the above-described total combination ratio and total combination ratio based on the total result. The details of the payout number tabulation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medium time counting process (S2013). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates the above-mentioned medium time combination ratio and medium time combination ratio based on the game information totaled by the payout number totaling process (see S2012). The details of the intermediate time counting process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the processing of S2013, the main CPU 101 ends the role ratio monitor aggregation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

[Data table used for role monitor aggregation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, data, a data table, and the like used for the role ratio monitor aggregation process will be described. Note that the data, the data table, and the like shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 are configured to be stored in a non-specified work area in the main RAM 103.

  In FIG. 28, “role ratio monitoring state”, “total number of games”, “ART game state flag”, “special award signal”, “advantageous area ratio calculation table”, “work for advantageous area ratio calculation”, “objects” And “Combination ratio calculation table 1” and “Work for calculating an accessory and combination ratio”.

  The “role ratio monitoring state” stores data indicating the status of the total number of games and whether or not the total value has reached the upper limit. For example, data indicating the 6000G (game) arrival state or 175000G (game) arrival state is stored as data indicating the total number of games, and data indicating whether or not the total value has reached the upper limit Data indicating the number upper limit reaching state and the total payout number upper limit reaching state is stored. The “total number of games” stores the total number of total games used for obtaining data to be stored in the “ratio monitoring state”. In addition, data such as the total payout number and the total input number can be stored.

  The “ART gaming state flag” is a flag indicating whether an ART gaming state or a non-ART gaming state, and is used for calculating an advantageous section ratio.

  The “special prize signal” is data indicating the gaming state of the game to be counted. For example, it is data indicating a gaming state such as SB, CB, and RB, which is determined based on the gaming state flag stored in the gaming state flag storage area.

  The “favorable section ratio calculation table” includes an advantageous section game number storage area, a total number of games storage area, an advantageous section ratio display data storage area, and an end code. In the advantageous section totaling process (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, in the “favorable section ratio calculation table”, the “favorable section ratio calculation work” storage area corresponding to the advantageous section game number storage area and the total game number storage area respectively. The storage result corresponding to the “favorable section ratio calculation table” is stored from the storage area of the “favorable section ratio calculation work” when the total result is stored and the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIGS. 30 and 31) is performed. Data is set to.

  The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the “favorable section ratio calculation table”. Based on the calculation result, the ratio information (type information “7U” "Advantageous section ratio)" is displayed. The end code of the “favorable section ratio calculation table” is data that serves as a stopper for calculation processing in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the advantageous section totaling process.

  In the “Combination and combination ratio calculation table 1”, there are a total combination payout number storage area, a total payout number storage area, a total combination ratio display data storage area, a total combination payout number storage area, a total payout number storage area, a total An accessory ratio display data storage area and an end code are included. In the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34), which will be described later, the total consecutive payout number storage area, the total payout number storage area, the total payout number storage area, and the total payout number of the “Combination and Linkage Ratio Calculation Table 1”. The tabulation results are stored in the storage areas of the “acts and combined ratio calculation work” corresponding to the respective storage areas, and when performing the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIGS. 34 and 31), Data is set from the storage area of the “working ratio calculation work” to the corresponding storage area of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 1”. The same value is set in the two total payout number storage areas of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 1”.

  The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the total combination ratio display data storage area of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 1”. Based on this calculation result, the ratio information ( Total association ratio of type information “6A”) is displayed. On the other hand, the calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the total combination ratio display data storage area of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 1”. The ratio information (total combination ratio of type information “7A”) is displayed. Further, the end code of “combination and combined ratio calculation table 1” is data that serves as a stopper for the calculation process in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the payout number tabulation process. Here, the calculation of the total combination ratio and total combination ratio is performed.

  FIG. 29 shows the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 2” and “6000G payout buffer”.

  In the “Combination item and combination ratio calculation table 2”, there are a medium-time combination combination payout number storage area, a medium-time combination number storage area, a medium-time combination ratio display data storage area, a medium-time combination combination payout number storage area, a medium It includes a time payout number storage area, a medium time character ratio display data storage area, and an end code. The payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34) and the medium time totaling process (see FIG. 35) described later store the totaling results in the storage area of “6000G payout buffer” described later, and the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIGS. 35 and 35). 31), data is set from the storage area (the storage area of the 6000G payout buffer) to the corresponding storage area of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 2”. The same value is set in the two medium-time payout number storage areas of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 2”.

  The calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the medium time combination ratio display data storage area of the “object and combination ratio calculation table 2”, and the ratio is displayed in the ratio monitor 95 based on this calculation result. Information (medium time combination ratio of type information “6Y”) is displayed. On the other hand, the calculation result of the ratio calculation data setting process is set in the medium-time character ratio display data storage area of the “character and character combination ratio calculation table 2”. Role ratio information (medium-time rate ratio of type information “7Y”) is displayed. Further, the end code of the “combination and combination ratio calculation table 2” is data that serves as a stopper for the calculation process in the ratio calculation data setting process, and is set in the medium time aggregation process. Here, the calculation of the medium time combination ratio and the medium time combination ratio is performed.

  In the “6000G payout buffer”, there are two systems (the array [0] and the array [1] of the medium time consecutive payout number storage area, the medium time item payout number storage area, and the medium time payout number storage area, respectively). System) included. In these storage areas, in the payout number totaling process of FIG. 34, for every 3000 games, the payout number is accumulated while alternately switching the system, and the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 35) is performed in the medium time totaling process (see FIG. 35). 31), the data stored in the storage area of the “6000G payout buffer” is added in the system [0] and the system [1], and the corresponding “combination and combination ratio calculation table 2” To the corresponding storage area.

[Advantageous section count processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the advantageous section totaling process performed in S2011 in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the advantageous section totaling process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role monitoring state is a state where the total number of games is reached (S2021). In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of games that can be aggregated is set to “16777215” (3 bytes), and in this process, it is determined whether or not the aggregated total number of games has reached the upper limit. Note that the upper limit of the total number of games that can be aggregated can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper limit of the total number of games that can be aggregated may be determined as “4294967295” (4 bytes). Further, for example, a predetermined value (for example, “175000”) within a range of 3 bytes may be set.

  In S2021, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitor state is the total game number upper limit reached state (when S2021 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous interval totaling process, and the process is monitored by the role ratio monitor. The processing shifts to S2012 in the counting processing (see FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2021 that the role ratio monitor state is not the total game number upper limit reached state (when S2021 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a game number addition process (S2022). In this game number addition process, if the ART function is in operation (that is, during an advantageous period), data in the advantageous area game number storage area (work), which is composed of 3 bytes and totals the number of games in the advantageous area, is 1 In addition to the addition, 1 is added to the data of the total game number storage area (work), which is composed of 3 bytes and totals the number of games. Further, if the ART function is not in operation (that is, during a normal section that is not in an advantageous section), only 1 is added to the data in the total game number storage area (work) described above.

  Whether or not the ART function is in operation is determined with reference to, for example, an ART gaming state flag (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the ART gaming state is basically a RT4 state and a gaming state in which the ART is won. In this embodiment, when the RT state transitions to the RT4 state after winning the ART, the ART game is started. Therefore, the value of the ART gaming state flag is set based on whether or not the ART is being won and whether or not the gaming state flag storage area indicates the RT4 state. Each bit in the game state flag storage area is assigned a unique bonus type or RT type based on the result of the internal lottery.

  In the present embodiment, the number of games is counted while the ART function is in operation as an advantageous period. However, what kind of game is considered as an advantageous area is determined based on a predetermined criterion. sell.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of addition to the total game number storage area (work) exceeds the total game number upper limit (or may be the total game number upper limit) (S2023). . In S2023, when the main CPU 101 determines that the addition result to the total game number storage area (work) exceeds the total game number upper limit (when S2023 is YES), the main CPU 101 enters the total ratio monitor state. A game number upper limit reaching state is set (S2024). After the process of S2024, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section totaling process, and moves the process to the process of S2012 in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2023 that the addition result to the total game number storage area (work) does not exceed the total game number upper limit (when S2023 is NO), the main CPU 101 The lower two bytes of data in the number storage area (work) are acquired (S2025). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached “6000” game (S2026).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2026 that the total number of games has reached the “6000” game based on the lower 2 bytes of data in the total game number storage area (work) (when S2026 is YES), the main CPU 101 The CPU 101 sets the total number of games reached 6000G state in the role ratio monitor state (S2027). Then, after the processing of S2027, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the processing of S2032, which will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2026 that the total number of games has not reached the “6000” game based on the lower two bytes of data in the total number of games storage area (work) (when S2026 is NO) ) The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached the game “175000” (S2028). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lower two bytes of data in the total game number storage area (work) are “0AB98H”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2028 that the total number of games has not reached the “175000” game based on the lower 2 bytes of data in the total game number storage area (work) (when S2028 is NO), The main CPU 101 moves to the process of S2032, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2028 that the total number of games has reached the “175000” game based on the lower 2 bytes of data in the total number of games storage area (work) (when S2028 is YES). The main CPU 101 acquires the upper 1 byte data of the total game number storage area (work) (S2029).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the total number of games has reached the “175000” game (S2030). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the upper 1-byte data in the total game number storage area (work) is “02H”. When the main CPU 101 determines in S2030 that the total number of games has not reached the “175000” game, based on the upper 1 byte data of the total number of games storage area (work) (when S2030 is NO). The main CPU 101 moves to the process of S2032, which will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2030 that the total number of games has reached the “175000” game based on the upper one byte data of the total number of games storage area (work) (when S2030 is YES). The main CPU 101 sets the total number of games reached 175000G in the role monitor state (S2031).

  After S2027, if S2028 is NO, S2030 is NO, or after S2031, the main CPU 101 stores the data of the advantageous interval game number storage area (work) and the total game number storage area (work). An advantageous section ratio calculation table is set (S2032). In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio calculation table (calculation data table for calculating the advantageous section ratio) is, as shown in FIG. 28, the advantageous section game number storage area, the total number of games storage area, and the advantageous section ratio. This is a table in which addresses are specified in the order of display data storage area and end code.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs ratio calculation data setting processing (S2033). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates an advantageous section ratio based on the data in the advantageous section game number storage area and the data in the total game number storage area, and stores the calculation result in the advantageous section ratio display data storage area. The details of the ratio calculation data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S2033, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section totaling process, and moves the process to the process of S2012 in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27).

  In this embodiment, as shown in S2021 of FIG. 30, when the role ratio monitoring state has reached the upper limit of the total number of games, the advantageous section totaling process is terminated and the process is processed as the role ratio monitoring totaling process (see FIG. 27). The processing is controlled so as to shift to the processing of S2012 in the middle, and further, it is possible to control the role monitor 95 to display a predetermined character string (for example, error display “ERR1”) indicating this state. it can.

[Ratio calculation data setting processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 31, S2033 in the advantageous section totaling process (see FIG. 30), S2118 in the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34 described later), and the intermediate time totaling process (described later). The ratio calculation data setting process performed in S2127 in FIG. 35 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ratio calculation data setting process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address of the calculation data table is an end code (S2041). That is, the main CPU 101 determines that the current address is the end code when the advantageous section ratio calculation table, the later-described role and combination ratio calculation table 1, or the later-described combination and combination ratio calculation table 2 is set. It is determined whether or not (00H).

  In S2041, when the main CPU 101 determines that the address of the calculation data table is an end code (in the case of YES determination in S2041), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation data setting process, and the advantageous interval totaling process (FIG. 30). In the case of S2033 in (see FIG. 27), this advantageous period totaling process is also ended, and the process moves to S2012 in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and the payout number totaling process (see FIG. 34 described later) is being performed. In the case of S2118, the payout number totaling process is also ended, and the process moves to S2013 in the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and in S2127 in the medium time counting process (see FIG. 35 described later) described later. In this case, the process is shifted to S2128 during the intermediate time counting process.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2041 that the calculation data table address is not an end code (when S2041 is NO), the main CPU 101 uses the calculation data table address as the calculation work address 1 (numerator). Transfer to calculation work address 2 (denominator) (S2042). In this process, for example, when the advantageous section ratio calculation table is set, the address of the advantageous section storage area is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the total game number storage area is calculated. Transferred to address 2 (denominator).

  Also, in this process, for example, when a later-described combination of items and combination ratio calculation table 1 is set, an address of a total combination combination payout number storage area described later is transferred to calculation work address 1 (numerator). The address of the total payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). Alternatively, the address of the later-described total payout number storage area is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the later-described total payout number storage area is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator).

  Further, in this process, for example, when a later-described combination of items and combination ratio calculation table 2 is set, the address of the medium-time consecutive combination payout number storage area described later is used as the calculation work address 1 (numerator). The address of the medium-time payout number storage area, which will be described later, is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). Alternatively, the address of the medium time payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator), and the address of the medium time payout number storage area described later is transferred to the calculation work address 2 (denominator). .

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ratio calculation process (S2043). In this process, the ratio information is calculated based on the game information transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator) and the calculation work address 2 (denominator). Details of the ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

  Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the address of the display data storage area from the calculation data table (S2044). In this process, for example, when the advantageous section ratio calculation table is set, the address of the advantageous section ratio display data storage area is acquired, and the later-described combination and combination ratio calculation table 1 is set. If the address of the total combination ratio display data storage area or total combination ratio display data storage area described later is acquired and the combination of the combination and combination ratio calculation table 2 described below is set, the medium time The address of the combination ratio display data storage area or the medium-time combination ratio display data storage area is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 101 updates the calculation data table address by +1 (S2045). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation process (see S2043) as display data (ratio information) in the corresponding display data storage area of the calculation data table (S2046). After the process of S2046, the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S2041.

[Ratio calculation processing (approximate value formula)]
Next, the first aspect (approximate value formula) of the ratio calculation process performed in S2043 of the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula).

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is 0 (S2051). In S2051, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is 0 (when S2051 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula), The process is shifted to the process of S2044 in the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2051 that the value of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) is not 0 (when S2051 is NO), the main CPU 101 stores the data of the calculation work address 1 (numerator). Transfer to the calculation work 1 (S2052). As described above, the value transferred to the calculation work address 1 (numerator) is a value within the range of 3 bytes. However, as described later, the value of the calculation work 1 is multiplied by 100. The calculation work 1 (numerator) is composed of 4 bytes (however, the effective bit is 31 bits because the 32nd bit is always 0). Of course, the calculation work address 1 (numerator) may be composed of 4 bytes as in the calculation work 1 (numerator).

  Next, the main CPU 101 transfers the data of the calculation work address 2 (denominator) to the calculation work 2 (S2053). As described above, as calculation work 1 (numerator) is composed of 4 bytes, calculation work 2 (denominator) is 4 bytes (however, like calculation work 1 (numerator), the effective bit is 31 bits). ). Of course, the calculation work address 2 (denominator) may be composed of 4 bytes as in the calculation work 2 (denominator).

  Next, the main CPU 101 multiplies the data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100 (S2054). In this ratio calculation process, as will be described later, the data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) is divided by the data of the calculation work 2 (denominator) to calculate a 100-percentage (percentage). Therefore, in this process, the numerator is multiplied by 100 in advance so that the quotient calculated at that time becomes an integer. The data of calculation work 1 (numerator) may be divided by the data of calculation work 2 (denominator) and then multiplied by 100 to calculate the quotient. Further, when the ratio information is displayed on the role ratio monitor 95, a value multiplied by 100 may be displayed. Further, according to the ratio information to be calculated, how many times the data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) is to be increased can be appropriately changed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets the highest address (that is, the fourth byte) of the calculation work 1 (numerator) and sets the highest address (that is, the fourth byte) of the calculation work 2 (denominator) (S2055). ). Next, the main CPU 101 sets 2 in the search counter and 0 in the shift counter (S2056).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical OR operation on the 1-byte data of the calculation work 1 (numerator) and the 1-byte data of the calculation work 2 (denominator) (S2057). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the logical sum operation is 0 (S2058). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1-byte data to be searched stored in the calculation work 1 (numerator) and the calculation work 2 (denominator) is zero.

  In S2058, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the logical sum operation is not 0 (S2058 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S2062. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2058 that the value of the logical sum operation is 0 (when S2058 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the calculation work 1 (numerator) by −1, The address of the calculation work 2 (denominator) is updated by -1 (S2059).

  Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the search counter set (S2060). That is, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the search counter. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the search counter is 0 (S2061). In S2061, when the main CPU 101 determines that the search counter is not 0 (when S2061 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S2057. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the search counter is 0 in S2061 (when S2061 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to the processing of S2065 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2058 that the value of the logical sum operation is not 0 (when S2058 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the value of the logical sum operation to the right (S2062). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the least significant bit is 1 as a result of the processing of S2062 (S2063). In other words, the main CPU 101 searches for the bit string that is 1 at the top in the range of the maximum value to be counted (for example, “175000” as the total number of games) according to the result of the logical sum operation.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S <b> 2063 that the value of the least significant bit is 1 (when S <b> 2063 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S <b> 2065 described below. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2063 that the value of the least significant bit is not 1 (when S2063 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the shift counter (S2064). After the process of S2064, the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S2062.

  When S2061 is YES or S2063 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the shift counter is 0 (S2065). In S2065, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the shift counter is not 0 (when S2065 is NO), the main CPU 101 uses the value of the shift counter to calculate the calculation work 1 (numerator) for 2-byte calculation. And shift the calculation work 2 (denominator) for 2-byte calculation (S2066). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines the data for 2 bytes from the bit string that is 1 at the top in the range of the maximum value to be counted (for example, “175000” of the total number of games) according to the result of the OR operation. Are extracted in each of calculation work 1 (numerator) and calculation work 2 (denominator), and stored in the lower 2 bytes.

  On the other hand, in S2065, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the shift counter is 0 (when S2065 is YES), or after the processing of S2066, the main CPU 101 performs calculation work 1 (numerator) and calculation work 2 2 bytes (lower 2 bytes) of data (numerator / denominator) are obtained from (denominator) (S2067).

  Next, the main CPU 101 calculates the quotient by dividing the acquired numerator by the acquired denominator (S2068). Next, the main CPU 101 multiplies the value of the original calculation work 2 (denominator) by the calculated quotient (S2069). Next, the main CPU 101 compares the multiplication result of S2069 with the value after multiplying the original value of the calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100 (S2070).

  Next, the main CPU 101 corrects the value of the quotient (ratio) with the comparison result of S2070 (S2071). Specifically, the main CPU 101 corrects the quotient (ratio) by 1 when the multiplication result in S2069 is larger than the value obtained by multiplying the original calculation work 1 (numerator) by 100. I do. In this process, an appropriate correction process may be performed so that the quotient (ratio) value calculated as the approximate value is less likely to cause an error with the true value. Therefore, the correction process may be performed by setting another comparison value in S2070 and performing another calculation. That is, in this correction process, all calculations for making it difficult to cause an error between the calculated approximate value and the true value can be employed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the quotient (ratio) is 100 or more (S2072). Normally, the quotient (ratio) does not exceed 100. Therefore, in this process, it may be determined whether or not the quotient (ratio) is 100. In this case, if it is determined that the number exceeds 100, this may be used as an error factor, and error processing may be performed.

  In S2072, when the main CPU 101 determines that the quotient (ratio) is 100 or more (when S2072 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the quotient (ratio) (S2073). In the present embodiment, as described above, the role ratio monitor 95 can only display numerical values up to two digits. After the process of S2073, the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula), and shifts the process to the process of S2044 in the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2072 that the quotient (ratio) is not 100 or more (in the case where S2072 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the ratio calculation process (approximate value formula), and the process calculates the ratio. The process moves to S2044 in the data setting process (see FIG. 31).

  In the present embodiment, the ratio calculation process in S2043 of the ratio calculation data setting process (see FIG. 31) is performed by a method using the approximate expression shown in FIGS. 32 and 33. Various other methods can be used depending on the capacity of the main CPU 101 and the limitations on the capacities of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103.

[Payout count processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the payout number totaling process performed in S2012 of the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout number totaling process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of payouts is 0 (S2101). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a medal has been paid out in the current game. In this process, it may be determined whether or not the payout number is 0 without considering the input number, or it is determined whether or not the payout number is 0 in consideration of the input number. You may make it do. For example, when three medals are inserted and three medals are paid out in this game, the payout number is 3 in the former, but the payout number is 0 in the latter. In short, in the payout number tabulation process, the payout number may be simply tabulated or the net increase number may be tabulated.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2101 that the number of payouts is 0 (when S2101 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number totaling process, and the process is a role monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27). The process proceeds to S2013. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2101 that the number of payouts is not 0 (when S2101 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes (may be 2 bytes) and has a predetermined game period ( 3 bytes addition processing for adding the data (medium time payout number) stored in the medium time payout number storage area for summing up the payout number at 6000 times and the current payout number is performed (S2102). As shown in FIG. 29, the middle-time payout number storage area of the 6000G payout buffer is managed in two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games. The detailed description of the 3-byte addition process is omitted (the same applies hereinafter).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role ratio monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (S2103). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total payout number that can be totaled is set to “16777215” (3 bytes). In this process, it is determined whether or not the total total payout number has reached the upper limit. In addition, the upper limit of the total payout number that can be totaled can be changed as appropriate. For example, the upper limit of the total payout number that can be totaled may be determined as “4294967295” (4 bytes). Further, for example, a predetermined value (for example, “210000”) within a range of 3 bytes may be set.

  In S2103, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitor state is the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2103 is YES), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S2107 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2103 that the role ratio monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2103 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes and totals the total payout number. A 3-byte addition process for adding the current payout number to the data (total payout number) stored in the total payout number storage area (work) is performed (S2104).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has reached the upper limit (S2105). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2105 that the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has not reached the upper limit (when S2105 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs processing in S2107, which will be described later. Move on to processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2105 that the data stored in the total payout number storage area (work) has reached the upper limit (when S2105 is YES), the main CPU 101 enters the role monitor state. The state of reaching the total payout number upper limit is set (S2106).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2103 that the role ratio monitor state is the state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (when S2103 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the total payout number storage area (work) in S2105. The main CPU 101 obtains a special prize signal when it is determined that the upper limit data has not reached the upper limit (when S2105 is NO) or after the processing of S2106 (S2107).

  Next, the main CPU 101 outputs a special signal indicating the operation of one of SB (ordinary bonus), CB (second special bonus), or RB (first special bonus) for the acquired special bonus signal. It is determined whether (generated) or not (S2108). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether any of the mounted bonuses (special prizes) is in operation. In the present embodiment, SB (ordinary accessory) and CB (second-type special accessory) are not mounted, and RB (first-special special agent) is always provided in the BB (special-item continuous operating device). Is activated.

  In S <b> 2108, the main CPU 101 does not output (generate) a special prize signal indicating any operation of SB (ordinary bonus), CB (second special bonus), or RB (first special bonus). (When S2108 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to S2116 described later. On the other hand, in S2108, the main CPU 101 outputs (generates) a special prize signal indicating the operation of any one of SB (ordinary bonus), CB (second special bonus), or RB (first special bonus). When it is determined that the special prize signal is output (generated), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special prize signal that is output (generated) is RB (first-type special combination) (S2109). .

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2109 that the special award signal being output (generated) is not RB (first-type special character) (when S2109 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs processing in S2113 described later. Move to processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the output (generated) special prize signal is RB (first-type special character) (when S2109 is YES), the main CPU 101 has 3 bytes (2 bytes). Data stored in the 6000G payout buffer medium time consecutive payout number storage area, which totals the payout number due to the operation of BB (RB) in a predetermined game period (6000 times) A 3-byte addition process for adding the current payout number to the medium time continuous payout number) is performed (S2110). As shown in FIG. 29, the 6000 G payout buffer medium time consecutive payout number storage area is managed in two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ratio monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (S2111). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2111 that the role ratio monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2111 is NO), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes and is the total payout by the operation of BB (RB). A 3-byte addition process for adding the current payout number to the data (total combined payout number) stored in the total continuous payout number storage area (work) for counting the number of sheets is performed (S2112).

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2109 that the special award signal being output (generated) is not RB (first-type special object) (when S2109 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the ratio monitor When it is determined that the state is the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2111 is YES), or after the processing of S2112, the main CPU 101 is configured with 3 bytes (may be 2 bytes) The data stored in the 6000G payout buffer medium time work payout number storage area (medium time work payout number) is summed up for the number of payouts due to the operation of all the works during the game period (6000 times). A 3-byte addition process for adding the payout number is performed (S2113). As shown in FIG. 29, the 6000 G payout buffer medium time item payout number storage area is managed in two systems by two arrays, and the system is switched every 3000 games.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role ratio monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (S2114). In S2114, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (when S2114 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number totaling process, and the process is monitored by the role ratio monitor. The process proceeds to S2013 in the aggregation process (see FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2114 that the role ratio monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2114 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 is composed of 3 bytes, and all the functions are activated. 3 bytes addition processing for adding the current payout number to the data (total work payout number) stored in the total work payout number storage area (work) for summing up the total payout number is performed (S2115).

  In S <b> 2108, the main CPU 101 does not output (generate) a special prize signal indicating any operation of SB (ordinary bonus), CB (second special bonus), or RB (first special bonus). (S2108 is NO determination), or after the processing of S2115, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (S2116). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2116 that the role ratio monitoring state is a state where the total payout number upper limit has been reached (when S2116 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the payout number totaling process, and the process is monitored by the ratio monitor. The process proceeds to S2013 in the aggregation process (see FIG. 27).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2116 that the role ratio monitor state is not the total payout number upper limit reached state (when S2116 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the total consecutive payout number storage area (work), The data of the item payout number storage area (work) and the total payout number storage area (work) are set in the accessory / interaction ratio calculation table 1 (S2117). In the present embodiment, the combination and combination ratio calculation table 1 (calculation data table for calculating the total combination ratio and total combination ratio) includes, as shown in FIG. This is a table in which addresses are designated in the order of a total payout number storage area, a total combination ratio display data storage area, a total payout number storage area, a total payout number storage area, a total payout ratio display data storage area, and an end code.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs ratio calculation data setting processing (see FIG. 31) (S2118). The ratio calculation data setting process is as described above, and a description thereof is omitted here. Then, after the processing of S2118, the main CPU 101 ends the payout number tabulation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S2013 in the role ratio monitor tabulation processing (see FIG. 27).

  In this embodiment, as shown in S2114 and S2116 in FIG. 34, when the role ratio monitor state has reached the total payout number upper limit, the payout number totaling process is terminated, and the process is determined as the ratio monitor totaling process (FIG. 27). The control is performed so as to shift to the processing of S2013 in the reference), and further, the role monitor 95 is controlled to display a predetermined character string indicating this state (for example, error display “ERR2”). You can also.

[Medium time processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the intermediate time totaling process performed in S2013 of the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the intermediate time counting process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 3000G management counter is less than 3000 (S2121). The 3000G management counter is a counter that counts the number of games after a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied (for example, when the counter is cleared) for display control of the role ratio monitor 95, and will be described later. Furthermore, until the 3000G management counter reaches 3000, the medium time combination ratio and medium time combination ratio are not calculated.

  In S2121, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 3000G management counter is less than 3000 (when S2121 is YES), the main CPU101 adds 1 to the 3000G management counter (S2122). Then, after the process of S2122, the main CPU 101 ends the intermediate time totaling process, ends the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and moves to the process of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

  On the other hand, in S2121, when the main CPU 101 determines that the 3000G management counter is not less than 3000 (when S2121 is YES), the main CPU 101 clears the 3000G management counter in S2122a and then pays 6000G from the buffer selection pointer. The buffer address is calculated (S2123). That is, based on the buffer selection pointer, the main CPU 101 grasps the 6000G payout buffer system (array [0] system or array [1] system), and stores each area (medium time payout number storage area, medium The addresses of the time consecutive payout number storage area and the medium time item payout number storage area (see FIG. 29) are calculated. As described above, the buffer selection pointer is a pointer indicating whether the system is array [0] or array [1] (assuming array [0] in the initial state), and will be described later in S2128. In this process, every 3000 games are alternately switched.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role ratio monitor state is the 6000G arrival state (see FIG. 30) (S2124). In S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitoring state is not the 6000G arrival state (when S2124 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to S2128 described later. In S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role monitoring state is not the 6000G arrival state (when S2124 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the intermediate time totaling processing, and the role monitoring totaling processing (FIG. 27) may also be terminated, and the process of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18) may be shifted.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2124 that the role ratio monitor state is the 6000G reaching state (when S2124 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines the 6000G payout buffer obtained in the payout number totaling process shown in FIG. The two systems of data stored in each area are added (S2125). For example, in the 6000G payout buffer, the data in the medium time payout number storage area [0] and the data in the medium time payout number storage area [1] are added, and the data in the medium time continuous payout number storage area [0] and the medium time are added. The data in the consecutive combination payout number storage area [1] is added, and the data in the medium time feature payout number storage area [0] and the data in the medium time function payout number storage area [1] are added (see FIG. 29). .

  In S2124, the main CPU 101 sets the data of each area obtained by the addition process of S2125 in the corresponding area of the combination of combination and ratio calculation table 2 (S2126). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the medium and time combination ratio is the combination of the combination and combination ratio calculation table 2 (the calculation data table for calculating the medium time combination ratio and the medium time combination ratio). Payout number storage area, medium time payout number storage area, medium time combination rate display data storage area, medium time item payout number storage area, medium time payout number storage area, medium time character ratio display data storage area, end code It is a table in which addresses are specified in the order of.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs ratio calculation data setting processing (see FIG. 31) (S2127). The ratio calculation data setting process is as described above, and a description thereof is omitted here. Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the buffer selection pointer (S2129). In the processing of S2129, when the buffer selection pointer becomes 2, the buffer selection pointer is cleared to 0. Thus, the state in which the buffer selection pointer indicates the system of the array [0] and the state indicating the system of the array [1] are alternately repeated.

  Next, based on the updated buffer selection pointer, the 6000G payout buffer of the corresponding system is cleared (S2129). After the process of S2129, the main CPU 101 ends the intermediate time totaling process, ends the role ratio monitor totaling process (see FIG. 27), and moves the process to the process of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 18).

  In this way, by switching the buffer selection pointer for every 3000 games, in the payout number totaling process shown in FIG. 34, the 6000G payout buffer is managed by a different system for every 3000 games, and the payout number for every 3000 games is stored and stored. can do. For this reason, in the medium time counting process in FIG. 35, the ratio of the latest 6000 games (the medium time series) is calculated by adding the 6000G payout buffer of the first system and the 6000G payout buffer of the second system to calculate the ratio. (Combination ratio, medium-time composition ratio) can be calculated at 3000 game intervals and displayed on the combination ratio monitor 95.

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate time totaling process is realized by the above-described method depending on the capacity of the main CPU 101 and the capacities of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103, but various other methods may be used. it can. For example, the ratio of the latest 6000 games can be grasped and displayed at shorter intervals, such as 1000 games or 1 game, according to the CPU capacity and the memory capacity.

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, an interrupt process performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of interrupt processing. 1. Interrupt processing repeatedly executed at a period of 1172 msec occurs based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization processing (see S2 in FIG. 17) of the timer circuit 113 (PTC). This is a process executed when an interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

  First, the main CPU 101 performs a register saving process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S902). In this process, signals input from various switches such as a stop switch are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. Three stepping motors are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S904). In this processing, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 9) of the main control circuit 90. After transmitting a command to the sub control circuit 200, the main CPU 101 subtracts and updates the communication data pointer by one packet (not shown), and clears the transmitted command data in the communication data storage area. If a plurality of command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the oldest stored order. When no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, that is, when the value of the communication data pointer is “0”, a no-operation command is generated and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs inserted medal passage check processing (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed through the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of the medal sensor (not shown). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a WDT restart process (S906).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6 and displays, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, stop button pressing order data, and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S908). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs count (subtraction) processing for various timers that have been set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S909). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S910). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on / off (door open) / off (door closed) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs role monitor display management processing (S911). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the display content of the role ratio monitor 95 according to the result of the summation and ratio calculation by the role ratio monitor summarization process (see FIG. 27). Details of the role monitor display management process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs role ratio information transmission processing (S912). In this process, the main CPU 101 shows the result of the totaling and ratio calculation (role ratio information) by the ratio monitor aggregation process (see FIG. 27) regardless of whether the role ratio monitor 95 is displayed or not. The BLE module 49 controls the wireless transmission. Details of the role ratio information transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S913). Then, after the process of S913, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt process.

[Role monitor display management process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, the role ratio monitor display management process performed in S911 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 36) will be described. 37 to 39 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the role ratio monitor display management process.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role display mode is display (display on) (S2141). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2141 that the ratio display mode is not display (display on) (non-display (display off)) (when S2141 is NO), the main CPU 101 initializes the display channel. (S2142).

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value (a timer value corresponding to a change interval of about 5 seconds) to the display update timer, and sets an initial value (a timer value corresponding to about 0.6 seconds) to the blinking management timer ( S2143). The display update timer is a timer that manages switching of display contents (type information and ratio information) on the role monitor 95, and the blink management timer is a timer that manages blinking of the display on the role monitor 95. After the process of S2143, the main CPU 101 ends the role monitor display management process, and shifts the process to the process of S912 in the interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2141 that the role ratio display mode is display (display on) (when S2141 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role non-display condition is satisfied. Is discriminated (S2144). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2144 that the role ratio non-display condition is not satisfied (when S2144 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is on ( S2145). As the condition non-display condition, for example, when the settlement switch 78 is in an on state, the setting key switch 54 (setting switch) is in an on state, a medal is inserted, and an error It is possible to set when there is a problem.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2144 that the role ratio non-display condition is satisfied (when S2144 is YES), or the main CPU 101 determines in S2145 that the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is not on. (When S2145 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets display end wait (wait for end) in the role ratio display mode (S2146). Here, the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is on means that the front door 2b is in an open state, and the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 is off means that the front door 2b is in a closed state. By the processing of S2146, when the front door 2b is in the closed state (because nobody sees the role monitor 95), the display of the role monitor 95 is suppressed. Such suppression of the display of the role ratio monitor 95 is also preferable from the viewpoint of security.

  On the other hand, in S2145, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door open / close monitoring switch 67 is on (when S2145 is YES), or after the processing of S2146, the main CPU 101 sets the turn-off timing (S2147). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the blinking management timer (S2148). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the blinking management timer is larger than the initial value / 2 (S2149).

  In S2149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the blinking management timer is larger than the initial value / 2 (when S2149 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the lighting timing (S2150). That is, the main CPU 101 lights the display of the role ratio monitor 95 when the value of the blinking management timer is within the predetermined range, and displays the display of the role ratio monitor 95 when the value of the blinking management timer is outside the predetermined range. Is turned off to cause the display of the role ratio monitor 95 to blink.

  On the other hand, in S2149, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the blink management timer is equal to or less than the initial value / 2 (when S2149 is NO), or after the processing of S2150, the main CPU 101 sets the display update timer to 1. Subtraction is performed (S2151). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display update timer has expired (S2152). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a period corresponding to the initial value of the set display update timer has elapsed.

  When the main CPU 101 determines in S2152 that the display update timer has expired (when S2152 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the display selection value (S2153). In this process, when the result of adding 1 to the display selection value is 5, the main CPU 101 sets 0 to the display selection value. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2152 that the display update timer has not expired (when S2152 is NO), or after the processing of S2153, the main CPU 101 determines the corresponding display data from the display selection value. Storage area (for example, the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the total combination ratio display data storage area of the combination and combination ratio calculation table 1, the total combination ratio display) The addresses of the data storage area, the combination of combination and combination ratio calculation table 2, the medium time combination ratio display data storage area, the medium time combination ratio display data storage area, etc.) are calculated (S2154).

  Here, the display selection value is a value for selecting the display contents of the role ratio monitor 95. For example, the display selection value 0 corresponds to the type information “7U” (advantageous section ratio), The display selection value 1 corresponds to the type information “6Y” (medium time combination ratio), the display selection value 2 corresponds to the type information “7Y” (medium time combination ratio), The display selection value 3 corresponds to the type information “6A” (total combination ratio), and the display selection value 4 corresponds to the type information “7A” (total combination ratio).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the role ratio monitoring state has reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (S2155). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to display the ratio information related to the type information corresponding to the display selection value from the role monitoring state.

  For example, regarding the advantageous section ratio of the type information “7U”, when the role ratio monitor state is not “175000G arrival state”, the ratio information for the type information is controlled to be hidden. In addition, regarding the medium time combination ratio of the type information “6Y” and the medium time character ratio of the type information “7Y”, when the role monitor state is not “6000G arrival state”, the ratio to the type information Information is controlled to be hidden. Further, “17500G arrival state” is provided as the role ratio monitoring state, and the role ratio monitoring state is “17500G arrival state” with respect to the total combination ratio of the type information “6A” and the total combination ratio of the type information “7A”. If not, the ratio information for the type information is controlled to be hidden.

  In S2155, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitor state is not the state in which the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information has been reached (when S2155 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that S2159 described later. Move on to processing. In this case, the ratio blink determination value is 0.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2155 that the role ratio monitor state has reached the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information (when S2155 is YES), the main CPU 101 In accordance with the display selection value, the type character string and the ratio blink determination value are acquired (S2156). The type character string is data for displaying type information, and the ratio blink determination value is data for selecting the display mode of the ratio information. For example, when the ratio display is blinked, “1” is displayed. "To set the ratio display to light, set" 2 ".

  Further, for example, when the ratio information is 70% or more with respect to the advantageous section ratio of the type information “7U”, the ratio information for the type information is controlled to blink. In addition, when the ratio information is 60% or more with respect to the medium time combination ratio of the type information “6Y” and the total combination ratio of the type information “6A”, the ratio information for the type information is controlled to blink. Is done. Furthermore, when the ratio information is 70% or more with respect to the medium-time character ratio of the type information “7Y” and the total character ratio of the type information “7A”, the ratio information for the type information is blinked. Be controlled.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a lighting timing (S2157). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2157 that it is the lighting timing (when S2157 is YES), the main CPU 101 moves the process to S2159 described later. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2157 that it is not the lighting timing (when S2157 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the extinguishing (S2158).

  In S2155, when the main CPU 101 determines that the role ratio monitor state is not the state where the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information has been reached (when S2155 is NO), in S2157, the main CPU 101 When it is determined that it is the lighting timing (when S2157 is YES), or after the processing of S2158, the main CPU 101 stores the type character string stored in advance in an abbreviation area (not shown) (S2159).

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires display data (ratio information) from the display data storage area corresponding to the type information to be displayed (S2160). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores, for example, an advantageous section ratio display data storage area, a total combination ratio display data storage area, a total combination ratio display data storage area, and a medium time combination ratio display data storage according to the display selection value. Display data stored in any one of the display data storage area of the area and the medium-time character ratio display data storage area is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the acquired ratio blink determination value is 0 (S2161). When the ratio blink determination value is 0, it is a case where the role ratio monitor state indicates a state where the specified number of games for displaying the ratio information has not been reached. In this case, the type information from the abbreviation area Is set in the type display area, and “-” is set in the ratio display area.

  That is, in S2161, when the main CPU 101 determines that the acquired ratio blink determination value is 0 (when S2161 is YES determination), the main CPU 101 displays the ratio display area (that is, as ratio information). "-" Is set in (display data) (S2162). That is, when the ratio blink determination value is 0, specific ratio information is not displayed. After the process of S2162, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S2166, and generates 7-segment display data for displaying “-”.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S 2161 that the acquired ratio blink determination value is not 0 (when S 2161 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display data is lighting or lighting timing. Is discriminated (S2163). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ratio information is continuously lit without blinking, or is blinked, and the lighting timing set in S2150 (display data is displayed). Whether or not it is time to do so. In the present embodiment, when the value of the ratio information exceeds a predetermined threshold (for example, when the advantageous section ratio, the combined service ratio, the accessory ratio, etc. become abnormal values), the inspector or the like To attract attention, control is performed so that the ratio information blinks.

  In S2163, when the main CPU 101 determines that the display data is not lit or the lighting timing (when S2163 is NO), the main CPU 101 clears the ratio display area (S2164). After the process of S2164, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of S2166, and generates 7-segment display data for displaying the cleared ratio display area.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S2163 that the display data is lighting or lighting timing (when S2163 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the display data in the ratio display area (S2165).

  Thereafter, a 7-segment display data generation process is performed based on the ratio display area data and the like thus set (S2166). In this processing, the 2-digit type character string set in the type display area and the display data set in the ratio display area (for example, "-", cleared data, etc. in addition to the 2-digit ratio information) 7-segment display data is generated to express the image with a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit (role ratio monitor 95). In this case, the 7-segment display data is, for example, 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data. Here, the 7-segment common output (selection) data is data specifying which digit of the duty ratio monitor 95 is output, and the 7-segment cathode output data is specifying which segment of the designated digit is lit. It is data to be.

  Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data to the role monitor 95 (S2167). As a result, the 7-segment common output (selection) data is sequentially output to the 7-segment LED of the digit selected by the 7-segment common output data, and the characters, numbers, and symbols specified for the 7-segment LED are displayed on the role monitor 95. Expressed (dynamic lighting control).

  Since such 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data are output sequentially at the interrupt timing, display, non-display status of characters, numbers, and symbols is realized for each 7-segment LED. In addition, display modes such as lighting and blinking are also controlled. In this example, 7-segment common output (selection) data and 7-segment cathode output data are output at each interrupt timing. However, the interrupt counter is updated at each interrupt, and the interrupt counter value is changed according to the interrupt counter value. The output process may be performed at a long predetermined interval.

  After the process of S2167, the main CPU 101 ends the role monitor display management process, and shifts the process to the process of S912 in the interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the value of the ratio information exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the ratio information is blinked in order to attract the attention of the inspector or the like, but there is a sufficient number of game information. If it is not stored, the type information can be blinked.

[Role information transmission processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the ratio information transmission process performed in S912 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 36) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of role ratio information transmission processing.

  First, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the display data storage area corresponding to all display selection values (0 to 4) (S2181). 38, for example, the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. The addresses of the data storage area, the total combination ratio display data storage area, the medium and combination combination ratio display data storage area, and the medium time combination ratio display data storage area are calculated.

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a type character string (type information) corresponding to each display selection value (S2182). For example, type information such as “7U”, “6Y”, “7Y”, “6A”, and “7A” is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires display data (ratio information) corresponding to each display selection value (S2183). For example, the advantageous section ratio is acquired from the advantageous section ratio display data storage area of the advantageous section ratio calculation table corresponding to the type information “7U”, and this display data is grasped as the ratio information corresponding to the type information “7U”. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 101 obtains a gaming machine ID (S2184). This gaming machine ID is, for example, an ID stored in the main ROM, and may be any identifier as long as the gaming machine can be uniquely identified at least in the hall store as described above. .

  Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the role ratio monitor state (S2185). As described above, the role ratio monitor state is stored in the main RAM, and stores data indicating the status of the total number of games and whether the total value has reached the upper limit. The counted number of games can be used instead of the role ratio monitoring state.

  Next, the main CPU 101 collects each of the acquired information (that is, the gaming machine ID, the role ratio monitor state, the role ratio information (type information and ratio information) as data related to all display selection values, The data is transmitted to the BLE module 49 of the concentrated terminal board 47 (S2186).

  After the process of S2186, the main CPU 101 ends the role ratio information transmission process and shifts the process to the process of S913 in the interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

  In the role ratio information transmission process according to the present embodiment, control is performed so that role ratio information regarding all display selection values is collectively transmitted to the BLE module 49. However, for example, one display selection value is obtained in one process. The role ratio information related to all display selection values may be transmitted by five processes (interrupt process).

  The role ratio information transmitted in this way is finally wirelessly transmitted via the BLE chip 49d of the BLE module 49, but the wireless transmission cycle is longer than the interrupt processing cycle of FIG. Can be adjusted by matching the transmission cycle with the transmission cycle of the BLE module 49 or receiving a wireless transmission end signal from the BLE module 49 by the role ratio information transmission process.

<Description of operation of BLE module>
[BLE transmission control processing in BLE module]
Next, a BLE transmission control process executed by the CPU 49a of the BLE module 49 and the BLE chip 49d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BLE transmission control process.

  First, the CPU 49a determines whether or not the transmission data transmitted from the main CPU 101 by the role ratio information transmission process shown in FIG. 40 has been received (S2201). When the CPU 49a determines in S2201 that the transmission data is not received (when S2201 is NO), the determination process is repeated. Here, for convenience, the determination process is repeated. However, the BLE transmission control process may be started when data transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received.

  When the CPU 49a determines in S2201 that the transmission data has been received (when S2201 is YES), the CPU 49a sets a predetermined value for the parameter (S2202). For example, when an iBeacon (registered trademark) beacon signal according to the BLE standard is transmitted, “organization ID” or “manufacturer ID” is set in UUID, and “gaming machine name ID” representing the gaming machine name is set in major. , “Machine ID” is set in minor.

  Next, in step S2203, the CPU 49a encrypts the role monitor status, role ratio information (type information and ratio information), and UUID, major, minor, and other data received from the main CPU 101 using a predetermined encryption method. The encrypted data obtained as a result of the encryption is stored in the RAM 49c. In this embodiment, the data including the role ratio information to be encrypted is configured in a unique format.

  Next, the CPU 49a determines whether or not it is a timing at which BLE transmission is possible (S2204). In S2204, when the CPU 49a determines that the BLE transmission timing has not arrived (in the case where S2204 is NO), the CPU 49a repeats the determination processing and waits until the BLE transmission timing arrives.

  In S2204, when the CPU 49a determines that the BLE transmission timing has arrived (in the case where S2204 is YES), the CPU 49a reads the encrypted data stored in the RAM 49c and the beacon signal according to the BLE standard. (S2205). In accordance with such control of the CPU 49a, the BLE chip 49d of the BLE module 49 modulates the encrypted data and transmits a radio wave (beacon signal) to the surroundings (via the antenna) based on the modulated data. .

  After the process of S2205, the CPU 49a returns to the process of S2201.

  In the present embodiment, by the role information transmission process shown in FIG. 40, the BLE module 49 is made to receive the role information corresponding to all display selection values (for example, type information “7U”, “6Y”, “7Y”). , "6A", "7A" information) are transmitted at a time, and accordingly, in the BLE transmission control process, the role ratio information corresponding to all these display selection values is wirelessly transmitted at once. Depending on the transmission data length limit and transmission timing according to the wireless transmission standard, the ratio information is divided into ratio information corresponding to one display selection value or divided into smaller data units, for example. Wireless transmission.

  In the present embodiment, basically, a gaming machine ID for identifying a gaming machine is transmitted to the BLE module 49 by the role ratio information transmission process shown in FIG. When such a gaming machine ID is not stored or set, an ID stored in the CPU 49a, ROM 49b, BLE chip 49d, etc. of the BLE module 49 is used, and this ID is used as a gaming machine number or the like. As a result, the gaming machines may be individually identified as a result. However, in this case, when the external concentration terminal board 47 is replaced, it is necessary to update the correspondence between the ID and the game machine number.

  40, 41, etc. as methods for realizing the transmission function for transmitting the role ratio information described above (the transmission function from the main control circuit 90 to the BLE module 49) and the transmission function for transmitting the role ratio information as a beacon signal. The procedure shown in FIG. 1 is merely an example, and the transmission function of the role ratio information having the same effect can be realized by various other methods.

[Omission of role monitor]
In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 calculates the ratio information by counting the number of games and the number of payouts in each game in the ratio monitor totaling process (S217 in FIG. 18) of the main process, and performing interrupt processing. In the role ratio monitor display management process (S911 in FIG. 36), control is performed so that the calculated role ratio information is displayed on the role ratio monitor 95.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the role ratio transmission process (S912 in FIG. 36) of the interrupt process, the role ratio information is transmitted by the beacon signal based on the BLE standard via the BLE module 49. . With such a configuration, the ratio information of each gaming machine can be received and displayed on a portable terminal or the like via a wireless communication network, and the ratio information can be confirmed without opening the front door 2b. .

  However, it is also possible to configure such that only the ratio information is transmitted by the BLE module 49 without displaying the ratio information by the ratio monitor 95. In this case, basically, execution of the role monitor display switching process of the medal reception / start check process (S226 in FIG. 19) and the role monitor display management process of the interrupt process (S911 in FIG. 36) are omitted. Can do.

<< Second Embodiment >>
Next, a connection configuration in the pachislot 1 ′ of the second embodiment, which is different from the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment in the connection configuration of the main control circuit and the BLE module, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 490 and the BLE module 449. As in the case of FIG. 11, a cabinet-side relay board is interposed between the main control circuit 490 and the BLE module 449, but is omitted here.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 42, the main control circuit 490 includes a microprocessor 491 (main CPU 401) and a role monitor 495, where the role monitor 495 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 491 transmits role ratio information (output data for a 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the role-ratio monitor 495, the role-ratio monitor 495 turns on a 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. The role ratio information is displayed.

  A relay circuit 448 and a BLE module 449 are mounted on the board of the external concentration terminal board 447, and the microprocessor 491 receives a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and When one medal is paid out, one signal is sent to the external data display device 300 connected to the external concentration terminal board 447 via the relay circuit 448. The

  The microprocessor 491 also transmits to the BLE module 449 game machine ID and role ratio source data necessary for obtaining role ratio information. The BLE module 449 includes a CPU 449a, a ROM 449b, a RAM 449c, and a BLE chip 449d. Based on the program stored in the ROM 449b, the CPU 449a collects the ratio source data when receiving data from the microprocessor 491 (the ratio source data for determining the gaming machine ID and the ratio information). Then, the role ratio information is obtained. Thereafter, the BLE chip 449d is controlled, and the gaming machine ID and the determined role ratio information are wirelessly transmitted as a BLE standard beacon signal from the antenna of the BLE chip 449d. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 449d can be received by a mobile device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via the wireless communication network.

  In the example of FIG. 42, the microprocessor 491 is configured to be directly connected to the BLE module 449 of the external concentration terminal board 447 by a cable, but is provided from the microprocessor 491 in various other connection forms. The game machine ID and role ratio source data for determining role ratio information are transmitted to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449. For example, as indicated by a dotted arrow in FIG. 42, a gaming machine ID and a role ratio are obtained by a route using a part of a signal line connecting the microprocessor 491 and the relay circuit 448 of the external concentrated terminal board 447. The ratio source data for obtaining information can be transmitted from the microprocessor 491 to the CPU 449a.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 11, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify gaming machines such as pachislot 1 (at least individually in a hall store), and various data can be used as gaming machine IDs. Can be adopted.

  The power supply for the external concentration terminal board 447 is provided from the main control circuit 490, for example. Further, a standby power source can be installed on the external concentrated terminal board 447. For example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be employed as the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, regarding the processing in the pachislot 1 ′ of the second embodiment, processing different from that of the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

[Main processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot 1 ′ executed under the control of the main CPU 401 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process.

  Here, the processing of S201 to S217 and S218 to S220 is the same as the processing in the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the second embodiment, a role ratio source data transmission process (S217a) is newly added after the role ratio monitor tabulation process of S217. This process is a process for transmitting the ratio source data to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 so that the ratio information can be obtained by the BLE module 449. Details of the role ratio source data transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Transmission of ratio source data]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the ratio source data transmission process performed in S217a in the main process (see FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the role ratio source data transmission process.

  First, the main CPU 401 determines whether or not the role source data transmission process is started for the first time (S2221). When the main CPU 401 determines that the start of the ratio source data transmission process is the first time (when S2221 is YES), the main CPU 401 acquires the gaming machine ID and sets it in the ratio source data (S2222). . The gaming machine ID is the same as that in the first embodiment, and is, for example, an identifier stored in the main ROM 402 that can identify the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ').

  When the main CPU 401 determines that the ratio source data transmission process is not activated for the first time (when S2221 is NO), or after the processing of S2222, the main CPU 401 displays the payout number, the ART gaming state flag, and the special prize signal. The information is acquired from the main RAM 403, and these pieces of information are set in the role source data (S2223). Here, the number of payouts is, for example, the number of payouts stored in the winning number counter (see FIG. 25), and the ART gaming state flag is a flag indicating whether or not this game is in an ART gaming state that is an advantageous section. It is. The special signal is data indicating the game state of the game, and is determined based on, for example, data stored in the game state flag storage area, and indicates game states such as SB, CB, and RB.

  Next, the main CPU 401 transmits the role ratio source data to the BLE module 449 of the external concentration terminal board 447 (S2224).

  After the process of S2224, the main CPU 401 ends the role ratio source data transmission process and shifts the process to the process of S218 in the main process (see FIG. 43).

<Description of operation of BLE module>
[BLE transmission control processing in BLE module]
Next, the BLE transmission control process executed by the CPU 449a and the BLE chip 449d of the BLE module 449 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BLE transmission control process.

  First, the CPU 449a determines whether or not the role source data transmitted from the main CPU 401 by the role source data transmission process shown in FIG. 44 has been received (S2241). When the CPU 449a determines in S2241 that the role ratio source data has not been received (when S2241 is NO), the CPU 449a repeats the determination process. Here, for the sake of convenience, the determination process is repeated. However, the BLE transmission control process may be started when the role ratio source data transmitted from the main CPU 401 is received.

  When the CPU 449a determines in S2241 that the role ratio source data has been received (in the case of YES in S2241), the CPU 449a determines whether the received role ratio source data includes a gaming machine ID (S2242). ). When the CPU 449a determines that a gaming machine ID is included in the received combination ratio source data (when S2242 is YES), the CPU 449a stores the gaming machine ID in a predetermined storage area (S2243). When the CPU 449a determines that the gaming machine ID is not included in the received role ratio source data (when S2242 is NO), or after the processing of S2243, the CPU 449a is based on the received role ratio source data. Then, the ratio monitor totaling process is performed (S2244).

  The role ratio monitor totaling process of S2244 is the same process as the ratio ratio monitor totaling process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 27, and the advantageous section totaling process (sequentially executed in the role ratio monitor totaling process of S2244 ( S2244a), payout number totaling process (S2244b), and medium time totaling process (S2244c) are respectively converted into advantageous section totaling process (S2011), payout number totaling process (S2012), and medium time totaling process (S2013) shown in FIG. Correspond.

  After the processing of S2244, the CPU 449a determines whether or not it is a timing at which BLE transmission is possible (S2245). In S2245, when the CPU 449a determines that the BLE transmission timing has not arrived (when S2245 is NO), the BLE transmission control process ends.

  When the CPU 449a determines in S2245 that the BLE transmission timing has arrived (when S2245 is YES), the CPU 449a sets a predetermined value for the parameter (S2246). For example, when an iBeacon (registered trademark) beacon signal according to the BLE standard is transmitted, “organization ID” or “manufacturer ID” is set in UUID, and “gaming machine name ID” representing the gaming machine name is set in major. , “Minor machine ID” stored in S2243 is set in minor.

  Next, the CPU 449a encrypts the role ratio information (that is, type information and ratio information) obtained as a result of the role ratio monitor aggregation processing in S2244 and data such as UUID, major, minor, etc., and obtains the result of the encryption. The encrypted data thus stored is stored in the RAM 449c (S2247).

  Next, the CPU 449a controls the BLE chip 449d to read the encrypted data stored in the RAM 449c and transmit a beacon signal according to the BLE standard (S2248). In accordance with such control of the CPU 449a, the BLE chip 449d of the BLE module 449 modulates the encrypted data and transmits a radio wave (beacon signal) to the surroundings (via the antenna) based on the modulated data. .

  After the process of S2248, the CPU 449a returns to the process of S2241.

  In the present embodiment, the role ratio information corresponding to all display selection values (for example, type information “7U”, “6Y”, “7Y”, “6A”, “7A”) is obtained by the role ratio monitor aggregation process of S2244. In response to this, in S2248, the ratio information corresponding to all of these display selection values is controlled to be wirelessly transmitted at once. However, the transmission data length of the wireless transmission standard is controlled. Depending on the restriction and transmission timing, the ratio information can be divided into, for example, ratio information corresponding to one display selection value, or divided into smaller data units and wirelessly transmitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44, the role source data including the gaming machine ID is transmitted from the main CPU 401, but such a gaming machine ID is stored in the main control circuit 490 or the like. If the ID is stored in the CPU 449a, the ROM 449b, the BLE chip 449d, etc. of the BLE module 449 and the ID is associated with the game machine number, etc. May be individually identified. However, in this case, when the external concentration terminal board 447 is replaced, it is necessary to update the correspondence between the ID and the game machine number.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the ratio monitor tabulation processing similar to that in the first embodiment is executed by the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449, the tabulation / calculation storage shown in FIGS. 28 and 29 is performed. Area (that is, role ratio monitor state, special prize signal, advantageous section ratio calculation table (including a storage area for accumulation corresponding to the storage area of the table), combination and combination ratio calculation table 1 (storage area of the table) ), And a storage area similar to that of the combination of the combination item and combination ratio calculation table 2 and the 6000G payout buffer) is stored in the RAM 449c.

  Still further, the role ratio monitor aggregation processing in the first embodiment stores the accumulated value because the main CPU 101 is generally an 8-bit CPU and the available memory capacity of the main RAM 103 is limited. As shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, when an upper limit is set for a storage area, only a part of the storage area is determined for numerical comparison, or a ratio calculation is performed based on two storage areas. Therefore, a processing method for saving CPU capacity and memory capacity, such as adopting a special method, is required.

  However, in the BLE module 449, the CPU 449a can be a CPU such as a 32-bit Risc processor, for example, and the RAM 449c can be a relatively large memory such as 84 kbytes or more. Therefore, when the BLE module 449 is configured to have a high-performance CPU and a large-capacity memory as described above, the above-mentioned “CPU of the CPU” executed in the role monitor totaling process in the first embodiment. The “processing method for saving capacity and memory capacity” is not essential. In the second embodiment, for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the ratio monitor aggregation process of the same method as the ratio monitor aggregation process in the first embodiment is performed.

  In addition, when the BLE module 449 is configured to have a high-performance CPU and a large-capacity memory as described above, for example, an entry is provided in the RAM 449c that can individually manage the payout number for 6000 games, Every time one game passes, the cumulative values such as “medium-time payout number”, “medium-time consecutive payout number”, “medium-time item payout number” are stored for the most recent 6000 games. The time combination ratio (type information “6Y”) and the medium time combination ratio (type information “7Y”) can be calculated. In the role ratio monitor totaling process shown in FIG. 27, the medium time combination ratio and medium time character ratio are updated to the most recent value every 3000 games in consideration of the CPU capacity and memory capacity. .

  In the role ratio original data transmission process shown in FIG. 44, the main CPU 401 transmits the role ratio original data to the BLE module 49 for each game. It is only necessary that the number of games and the number of payouts can be received. Therefore, every time a game with a payout number of 0 continues, the number of consecutive games is determined at a predetermined timing (without transmitting the role ratio source data). For example, it may be configured such that after the game with the payout number of 0 being continued, the ratio original data is transmitted at the timing (the timing at which the ratio original data is transmitted for a game with payout).

[Loading function]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a situation in which the count data stored in the BLE module 449 and the accumulated data are loaded (copied) from the main control circuit 490 will be described.

  In FIG. 46, in the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ') according to the second embodiment, a situation is shown in which the ratio source data is transmitted from the main control circuit 490 to the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 at the normal time. As described above, such transmission of role ratio source data is basically performed for each game. Further, as described above, based on the received combination ratio source data, the number of games is counted and the number of payouts is accumulated. The counting of the number of games and the accumulation of the number of payouts are the same processes as those performed for displaying the role ratio monitor 95 in the main CPU 401 of the main control circuit 490.

  That is, the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449 receives the role ratio original data from the main control circuit 490 for each game, but counts the number of games in response to the reception of the role ratio original data. That is, every time the role ratio source data is received, the data in the total game number storage area (work) is incremented by 1. If the game is advantageous for the period based on the ART game state flag, the number of advantageous segment games The storage area (work) data is incremented by 1 (see FIG. 28).

  In addition, every time the CPU 449a receives the combination ratio source data, the total consecutive payout number storage area (work), the total payout number storage area (work), and the total payout number storage area (in accordance with the received special prize signal) The payout number is added to the workpiece data (see FIG. 28). Further, the 6000G payout buffer medium time consecutive payout number storage area [0], [1], medium time item payout number storage area [0], [1], medium time payout number storage area [0], [1] ] Is added to the data according to the received special prize signal (see FIG. 29).

  Therefore, in the normal time, the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449 and the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490 have the same storage area (that is, the total game number storage area (work), the advantageous section game number storage area ( Work), total consecutive payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work), medium time continuous payout number storage area [0], [1], medium 46. The same data is stored in the hourly item payout number storage areas [0] and [1] and the medium time payout number storage areas [0] and [1]) (arrow A in FIG. 46).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the role ratio information such as the advantageous section ratio (type information “7U”) obtained from the count data of the total game number storage area (work) and the advantageous section game number storage area (work) is 175000 or more. When the number of games is counted, the role ratio information is calculated, and after the calculated role ratio information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, a beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d. Yes.

  In addition, a combined service ratio (type information “6Y”) or an object obtained from the accumulated data of the total consecutive payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work) In the present embodiment, the role ratio information such as the ratio (type information “7Y”) is calculated when the payout number is accumulated for the number of games of 6000 or more, and the calculated role ratio is calculated. After the information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, a beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d.

  Further, the accumulated data of the medium time consecutive payout number storage area [0], [1], the medium time item payout number storage area [0], [1], and the medium time payout number storage area [0], [1]. In the present embodiment, the ratio information such as the medium time combination ratio (type information “6A”) and the medium time combination ratio (type information “7A”) obtained from (partial cumulative data) is about 17500 or more games. When the payout number is accumulated, the ratio information is calculated, and after the calculated ratio information is transmitted to the BLE chip 449d, a beacon signal is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d. Yes.

  As described above, the reason why a large number of games have passed before the role information is transmitted is to make it possible to grasp only the role information that is statistically significant, The number of games such as 6000, 17500, and 175000 described above can be adjusted as appropriate.

  In addition, after the use of the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ′) is started, after a very large number of games such as 6000 games, 17500 games, and 175000 games are played, each role information is stored in the BLE chip. Therefore, if the above-mentioned count data and accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c are lost in the middle, it is necessary to count the count data and accumulate the accumulated data again for the number of games, It will take a lot of time before the role information is transmitted.

  Furthermore, if the count data or accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c is lost, the previous data is lost, so that the role information from the start of use of the gaming machine to the time of disappearance is lost. Even if the ratio information can be calculated and transmitted, this is not from the beginning of use of the gaming machine, and cannot be the original ratio information.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown by an arrow B in FIG. 46, when the count data or accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c is lost, the count is sent from the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490 at a predetermined timing. It can be configured to load data and cumulative data.

  Note that the above-described count data and accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c are lost in the middle, for example, when the external concentrated terminal plate 447 is replaced (due to a failure of the relay circuit 448 or the like), or when the RAM 449c is a volatile memory. In this case, there are various factors such as a power supply trouble.

  Next, a loading process in which the main control circuit 490 loads the BLE module 449 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a loading process procedure for loading (copying) count data and accumulated data from the main control circuit 490 to the BLE module 449 at a predetermined timing.

  This loading process can be executed, for example, after the process of S16 of the power-on process shown in FIG. 17 for the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment is completed. It can also be configured to be activated when a manager or the like performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ').

  In the loading process, first, the main CPU 401 refers to the data in the total game number storage area (work) of the main RAM 403 to determine whether or not the total game number is 0 (S2261). When the main CPU 401 determines that the total number of games is 0 (when S2261 is YES), the loading process is terminated because it is immediately after being introduced as a new gaming machine.

  When the main CPU 401 determines that the total number of games is not 0 (when S2261 is NO), the main CPU 401 stores the gaming machine ID and count data stored in the main ROM 402 (for example, the total number of games storage area ( Work) and advantageous section game number storage area (work)), and cumulative data (for example, total combination payout number storage area (work), total combination payout number storage area (work), total payout number storage area (work), 6000G payout buffer medium time consecutive payout number storage area [0], [1], medium time item payout number storage area [0], [1], medium time payout number storage area [0], [1]) Is acquired (S2262).

  Thereafter, in S2263, the acquired data is transmitted to the BLE module 449 (S2263). The transmission data includes a total game number storage area (work), from which the total number of games in the gaming machine can be grasped. At this time, the role ratio monitor state stored in the main RAM 403 can also be transmitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 401 ends the loading process.

<Description of operation of BLE module>
[Data storage processing in BLE module]

  Next, a process in which the BLE module 449 stores count data and accumulated data transmitted from the main control circuit 490 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of data storage processing for storing count data and accumulated data transmitted from the main control circuit 490.

  This data storage process is started as an initial process when, for example, the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ') is turned on and then the external concentration terminal board 447 is turned on. This process is also activated when the power is turned on for the first time after the external concentrated terminal board 447 is replaced and attached to the gaming machine (pachislot 1 '). Further, this data storage process can be configured to be activated in response to the loading process of the main control circuit 490 described above.

  In the data storage process, first, the CPU 449a determines whether or not the power is turned on for the first time at the external concentrated terminal board 447 (S2281). When the CPU 449a determines that the power is turned on for the first time at the external concentrated terminal board 447 (when S2281 is YES), that is, when the external concentrated terminal board 447 is attached to the gaming machine for the first time. As an initial process, storage areas such as count data and accumulated data are defined in the RAM 449c, and the storage areas are cleared (S2282).

  If the CPU 449a determines that the power is not turned on for the first time on the external concentrated terminal board 447 (when S2281 is NO), or after the processing of S2282, the CPU 449a has transmitted data from the main control circuit 490. Is discriminated (S2283). When the CPU 449a determines that data has not been transmitted from the main control circuit 490 (when S2283 is NO), the process returns to S2283 to repeat the determination.

  When the CPU 449a determines that data has been transmitted from the main control circuit 490 (when S2283 is YES), the total number of games transmitted from the main control circuit 490 is stored in the total number of games storage area (work) of the RAM 449c. It is determined whether the data is the same as () (S2284). When the CPU 449a determines that the total number of games is not the same (when S2284 is NO), the CPU 449a determines that the BLE module 449 needs to be loaded and proceeds to S2285, where the received data is stored in the RAM 449c. To remember. The received data includes a gaming machine ID. The gaming machine ID is transmitted together with the role ratio information when the role ratio information is transmitted by the BLE chip 449d.

  When the CPU 449a determines that the total number of games is the same (when S2284 is YES), or after the processing of S2285, the CPU 449a ends the data storage process.

  Even if the count data and accumulated data stored in the RAM 449c of the BLE module 449 are lost by the loading process by the main CPU 401 of the main control circuit 490 and the data storage process by the CPU 449a of the BLE module 449, the data is saved so far. This data can be restored from the data stored in the main RAM 403 of the main control circuit 490, and immediately after the recovery, the role information immediately after the start of use of the gaming machine can be grasped. The role ratio information can be transmitted by a beacon signal.

  Note that the procedure shown in FIGS. 47, 48, etc. is merely an example of a method for realizing the loading function described above, and a loading function having the same effect can be realized by various other methods.

  The configuration and processing of the pachislo 1 ′ of the second embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings. The configuration and processing other than the configuration and processing described above are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. Same as 1.

[Omission of role monitor]
In the second embodiment, display of the role ratio information by the role ratio monitor 495 can be omitted as in the first embodiment described above.

<< Third Embodiment >>
Next, the connection configuration in the pachislot 1 ″ of the third embodiment is different from the pachislot 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot 1 ′ of the second embodiment in the connection configuration of the main control circuit and the BLE module. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a circuit block diagram showing a connection form between the main control circuit 590 and the BLE module 549. 11 and 42, a cabinet-side relay board is interposed between the main control circuit 590 and the BLE module 549, but is omitted here.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 49, the main control circuit 590 includes a microprocessor 591 (main CPU 501) and a role monitor 595, where the role monitor 595 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 591 transmits the role ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the role-ratio monitor 595, the role-ratio monitor 595 turns on the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. The role ratio information is displayed.

  A relay circuit 548 and a BLE module 549 are mounted on the board of the external concentration terminal board 547, and the microprocessor 591 receives a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and When one medal is paid out, one signal is sent to the external data display device 300 connected to the external concentration terminal board 547 via the relay circuit 548. The

  Further, for the BLE module 549, the ratio information (output data for the 4-digit 7-segment LED) for displaying the ratio monitor 595 is, for example, branched by 12 signal lines, respectively. 591. In FIG. 49, a branch circuit in the main control circuit 590 for branching the signal line, a circuit in the BLE module 549 for extracting data from the signal from the signal line, and the like are omitted.

  The BLE module 549 includes a CPU 549a, a ROM 549b, a RAM 549c, and a BLE chip 549d. When the CPU 549a receives data from the microprocessor 591 (output data for 4-digit 7-segment LED by branching) based on the program stored in the ROM 549b, the CPU 549a obtains the role ratio information (type information) from the output data. And the ratio information (including display modes such as blinking and “-”), and then controlling the BLE chip 549d, and using the gaming machine ID and the obtained role ratio information as a BLE standard beacon signal, Wireless transmission is performed from the antenna of the BLE chip 549d. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 549d can be received by a portable device such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via the wireless communication network.

  The CPU 549a identifies which digit is to be displayed from the 7-segment common output data among the output data received from the microprocessor 591, and the symbol / number displayed in the identified digit from the 7-segment cathode output data. Is identified. In addition, since the output data does not include a gaming machine ID, it is necessary to separately receive the gaming machine ID from the main control circuit 590.

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 11, the gaming machine ID is an identifier such as a pachislot 1 ″ that can be individually identified (at least individually in the hall store), and various data can be stored in the gaming machine. It can be employed as an ID. However, when the identifier held by the BLE module 549 is used as the gaming machine ID, the reception process is not necessary.

  The power supply for the external concentration terminal board 547 is provided from the main control circuit 590, for example. Further, a standby power source can be installed on the external concentrated terminal plate 547. For example, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dyanamic RAM) or a non-volatile memory such as a flash memory can be employed as the RAM 549c of the BLE module 549.

  The configuration and processing of the pachislo 1 '' of the third embodiment have been described above with reference to the drawings. The configuration and processing other than the configuration and processing described above are basically the same as those of the first embodiment. The same as pachislot 1.

[Omission of role monitor]
In the third embodiment, display of the role ratio information by the role ratio monitor 595 can be omitted as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above.

[Configuration of external concentration terminal board]
In addition, the first embodiment to the third embodiment have been described so far, but the configuration of the external concentration terminal plate (47, 447, 547) according to each embodiment includes the configuration according to at least two embodiments, Based on the setting, processing corresponding to each configuration may be performed selectively or in parallel.

<< Fourth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of an information management system according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<System configuration>
First, an overview of an information management system 1001 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 includes an information management server 1100 and devices such as a hall computer 1200, a gaming machine 1300, an island edge counting device 1400, a POS 1500, and a hall management terminal 1600 that are arranged in the hall store. Configured. Further, a data display device 1350 and a sand device 1370 are connected to the gaming machine 1300.

  The gaming machine 1300 shown here includes, for example, the gaming machine (pachislot 1) according to the first embodiment described above, the gaming machine (pachislot 1 ′) according to the second embodiment, and the gaming machine (pachislot 1) according to the third embodiment. ''), And the gaming machine ID and the role ratio information are transmitted as beacon signals, for example, by the BLE modules (49, 449, 549) via the external concentration terminal boards (47, 447, 547), respectively.

  Further, the gaming machine 1300 is not limited to the pachislot machine according to the first to third embodiments, but may be a pachinko machine, for example. The player obtains game media (pachinko balls and medals) by playing with them. In this specification, for the sake of convenience, either type of gaming machine may be described, and in that case, the gaming medium is also described with respect to the gaming medium, but in such a case Even so, the present invention is not limited to either type of gaming machine.

  Further, the gaming machine 1300 is connected to the hall computer 1200 and transmits information related to the gaming situation and the number of game media to the hall computer 1200.

  The sand device 1370 is connected to the hall computer 1200, and performs rental of game media using a membership card, control of possession balls / storage balls, control of counting, and the like according to the player's operation.

  Further, a data display device 1350 is connected to the gaming machine 1300, and this data display device 1350 corresponds to the data display device 300 described above.

  The hall computer 1200 of the information management system 1001 stores and manages game information of a player who plays a game using the gaming machine 1300 in the hall store. For example, the game medium acquired by the player is managed as a stored ball or a stored medal (or possessed ball or held medal), or the operating status of each gaming machine 1300 is managed. Further, the hall computer 1200 controls a device such as the POS 1500 so that a prize desired by the player can be exchanged according to the value of the game medium acquired by the player.

  The hall computer 1200 further includes a hall DB 1250, in which a table for storing member information, the above-described stored balls, stored medals, operating conditions, and the like is stored.

  The island edge counting device 1400 is a device that counts the number of balls (medals) acquired by the player, and is arranged at the end of the “island” where a plurality of gaming machines 1300 are arranged together. In addition to such an island edge counting device 1400, the counting device can be placed at various locations in the hall store as a sand device with a counting function for each vehicle or other counting devices. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the counting device is incorporated in each sand device 1370 and arranged as an island edge counting device 1400.

  The POS 1500 is installed at a counter or the like of the hall store, and the staff of the hall store operates the POS 1500 in order to deal with a player's prize exchange or the like. For example, the receipt issued by the above-mentioned island edge counting device 1400 is received from the player and read into the POS 1500 (or the total number of game media transmitted from the sand device 1370 by the membership card presented by the player, etc.) Read out the number, the number of possessions and the number of balls), and provide the player with a prize of the corresponding value.

  In this way, in the hall store, the store POS (general prize) or special prize arranged at the store corner gift display corner of the hall store is exchanged by the function of the POS 1500.

  The hall management terminal 1600 is arranged in a hall store, and a predetermined operation such as a setting operation is performed by a manager of the hall store or the like.

  The information management server 1100 transmits data to a portable terminal 1700 carried by an inspector who inspects or inspects gaming machines, a player, a visitor to a hall store, or the like as necessary. In addition, the information management server 1100 includes an information management DB 1150. The information management DB 1150 stores a table for storing information related to the attributes, placement positions, and the like of gaming machines.

  Note that the mobile terminal 1700 includes various mobile terminals such as a mobile phone, a PDA, a feature phone, a tablet terminal, and a mobile PC.

  The information management server 1100 and the mobile terminal 1700 can be connected in various forms and routes. For example, the mobile terminal 1700 is connected to the information management server 1100 via a network including a wireless network based on wireless LAN communication, a mobile communication system such as 3G and 4G, and the Internet. In this case, the mobile terminal 1700 can transmit and receive data to and from the information management server 1100 without using a network device arranged in the hall store.

  Further, for example, it may be connected to a network device in a hall store such as the hall computer 1200 via a wireless LAN, and connected to the information management server 1100 via this network device.

  In this embodiment, the membership card distributed to a player who plays a game in a hall store is, for example, a non-contact IC chip including a non-contact IC chip based on near field communication (NFC) IC card. The sand device 1370 and the POS 1500 can identify the card (player of the card) by reading the unique ID of the player's non-contact IC card with a non-contact IC card reader or the like.

  In addition, the information management system 1001 of the present invention may include a gaming machine 1300 and a portable terminal 1700, and further includes a wireless signal transmission device 1800, a wireless signal transmission device 1900, a wireless signal transmission device 1950, and the like which will be described later. It may be composed of

  Note that the configuration of the information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 is merely an example, and a similar system can be constructed with various other configurations. For example, the information management server 1100 can be divided into a plurality of computers according to functions and the like. Further, the information management system 1001 shown in FIG. 50 is constructed in each hall store, and data is transmitted and received between the plurality of information management systems 1001 to link the hall stores with respect to predetermined functions and services. Is also possible.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the sand apparatus 1370 used in the information management system 1001 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the sand device 1370.

  The front unit 1321 of the sand device 1370 has an LED (light-emitting diode) 1331, a card insertion slot 1332, a bill insertion slot 1333 into which a bill can be inserted, an operation unit 1334 configured by a touch panel LCD (liquid crystal display), A camera 1335, a non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336, a medal (game medium) payout tray 1337, a speaker cover 1338, a medal (game medium) counting slot 1339, and the like are provided. The card insertion slot 1332 is an insertion slot that can accept an information card issued by a card issuing machine (not shown) in a hall, for example. The LED unit 1331 includes a full color LED 1331A and an infrared LED (infrared light emitting diode) 1331B.

  A player receives a medal as a game medium necessary for a game by inserting an information card (for example, an IC card) or a predetermined amount of banknotes into the card insertion slot 1332 or the banknote insertion slot 1333. it can. Further, the player can receive a medal required for the game by holding the non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336.

  The sand device 1370 receives an information card / banknote, or presents a non-contact IC card, and counts the number of medals according to the amount of the inserted value medium by a payout hopper provided inside. To pay out from the medal payout tray 1337. In addition, when the sand device 1370 receives an information card in which the number of usable medals is written, the number of medals according to the number of medals written in the inserted information card is paid out in the inside. It is counted by the hopper for paying out from the medal payout tray 1337. The player can play a game in the gaming machine 1300 by inserting the medal paid out from the medal payout tray 1337 into the medal slot of the gaming machine 1300.

  Here, in addition to the above-mentioned member card, various types of portable terminals such as a smartphone, a cellular phone, a PDA, a feature phone, a tablet terminal, and a mobile PC are used as the contactless IC card. Can do.

  In the gaming machine 1300, medals are paid out to the medal payout tray according to the result of the game. The player can pick up the medal from the medal payout tray and insert it into the medal counting slot 1339 of the sand device 1370 so that the sand device 1370 can count the medal. The sand device 1370 counts medals inserted from the medal counting insertion port 1339 by a counting hopper provided inside. As described above, the sand device 1370 is also provided in the gaming machine 1300 and has a function of counting medals paid out from the gaming machine 1300 according to the result of the game. ing.

  When the gaming machine 1300 is a pachinko machine, pachinko balls are introduced into the counting slot of the sand device 1370. For example, when a player drops a pachinko ball paid out on the upper plate as a result of the game to the lower plate by performing a predetermined operation, the pachinko ball falls on the guide plate mounted below the lower plate. To do. The guide dish guides the pachinko balls dropped from the lower dish to the counting slot provided in the sand device 1370. The pachinko balls introduced into the counting slot are counted by a counting unit provided in the sand device 1370.

  The counted results are recorded on an information card inserted from the card insertion slot 1332 or stored in a hall DB 1250 provided in the hall computer 1200 or a membership card which is a non-contact IC card. Further, the sand device 1370 may be provided with a printer, and the counted result may be printed on a receipt. Information such as balance data may be stored in the information card or non-contact IC card.

  The medals counted in the counting hopper are discharged from the discharge port provided on the bottom surface of the sand device 1370 to the conveyor and collected. Note that, in a place where no conveyor is provided, a storage box for storing medals may be installed in the lower part of the sand device 1370, and the medals may be discharged into the storage box.

  Note that when the gaming machine 1300 is a pachinko machine, the pachinko balls counted in the counting unit are discharged from a discharge port provided on the back surface of the sand device 1370 and collected. Further, apart from the pachinko ball counting path introduced from the counting slot, a fraction supply unit is provided on the back side of the sand device 1370 so as to receive the fraction pachinko balls from the outside. . By this supply unit, a fixed amount of the pachinko balls for fractions are always stored, and are dispensed from the fraction dispensing outlet to the guide tray as necessary.

  Next, the operation unit 1334 of the sand device 1370 will be described with reference to FIG. The operation unit 1334 includes a display 1334a and a touch panel type operation button 1334b. The operation button 1334b is displayed as an image imitating various buttons, and accepts a player's operation according to the image. Specifically, the operation button 1334b has various functions such as “return”, “lending”, “counting start”, “pay-out of ball”, “stop counting”, “save ball”, “service”, “pay-out”. Is displayed as an image simulating the operation button 1334b corresponding to the above process. The player can execute the process by touching the operation button 1334b corresponding to the desired process.

  For example, the “lending” operation button 1334 b inserts an information card into the card insertion slot 1332, holds a non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336, or inserts cash into the bill insertion slot 1333. This is the part that is operated when medals are desired to be lent. The “counting start” operation button 1334 b is a portion that is operated when a medal is inserted into the medal counting slot 1339 and counted. The “counting stop” operation button 1334b is a portion to be operated when counting is stopped after the medal counting is started. The “return” operation button 1334b is a part operated when returning the inserted information card. At this time, balance information, a medal or a stored medal, and a card ID as necessary are written in the information card.

  The player can receive a medal as a game medium necessary for the game by inserting an information card or a predetermined amount of banknotes into the card insertion slot 1332 or the banknote insertion slot 1333. Further, the player can receive a medal required for the game by holding the membership card (non-contact IC card) over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336.

<Configuration of information management server>
Next, the configuration of the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the information management server 1100.

  The information management server 1100 includes a main CPU 1101, a ROM 1102, a RAM 1103, an external storage device 1104, a display 1105, and an interface 1106.

  The main CPU 1101 reads and executes control programs stored in the ROM 1102 and the RAM 1103. For example, in response to a request from the mobile terminal 1700, the main CPU 1101 performs control so as to transmit information related to the gaming machine in the hall store.

  The display 1105 is a display device that displays information managed by the information management server 1100, and is, for example, a liquid crystal display device. The display 1105 can be omitted.

  The information management server 1100 is communicably connected to the hall computer 1200 and the portable terminal 1700 via the interface 1106. A control program related to the implementation of the present invention is stored in, for example, the external storage device 1104 and loaded into the RAM 1103. In addition, the control program can be provided from another device through the interface 1106 or from another device outside through a network including the Internet.

  The external storage device 1104 stores an information management DB 1150, and stores information on gaming machines and the like.

<Configuration of mobile terminal>
Next, the configuration of the mobile terminal 1700 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the mobile terminal 1700. A portable terminal 1700 includes a main CPU 1701, a ROM 1702, a RAM 1703, a camera 1704, a wireless communication antenna 1705, a GPS antenna 1706, a wireless signal receiving antenna 1707, a display 1708, a microphone 1709, a speaker 1710, and a sensor 1711.

  The main CPU 1701 reads and executes a control program stored in the ROM 1702 or the RAM 1703. For example, the main CPU 1701 executes an application downloaded via a wireless network, and displays predetermined information (for example, role ratio information) regarding the gaming machine based on a beacon signal received from the gaming machine 1300. Control.

  The ROM 1702 is referred to as “ROM (Read Only Mmory)”, but normally, a nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory is adopted, and downloaded applications and acquired data can be stored.

  The camera 1704 is, for example, a small imaging device built in the portable terminal 1700, and the imaging element is configured by a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or the like. A captured image (moving image or still image) captured by the camera 1704 by a user operation is stored in the RAM 1703 or the like under the control of the main CPU 1701, processed by a program as necessary, and displayed on the display 1708.

  The main CPU 1701 communicates with the mobile phone base station via the wireless communication antenna 1705, transmits / receives call data to make a call with other devices, and is provided from other terminals via the Internet. Control to browse the WEB page and send / receive data related to SNS communication. Further, the main CPU 1701 implements wireless LAN communication with a wireless LAN access point using a wireless communication antenna 1705 and performs data transmission / reception via the Internet (the antenna used for wireless LAN communication is basically a mobile phone). Although the antenna is different from the antenna that communicates with the telephone base station, it is collectively referred to as “radio communication antenna” here).

  The main CPU 1701 receives signals from a plurality of GPS (Global Positioning System) via the GPS antenna 1706 and detects the position of the mobile terminal 1700. The position information obtained by such detection processing is stored in the RAM 1703 or the like under the control of the main CPU 1701 and used in a program as necessary.

  The wireless signal receiving antenna 1707 is an antenna that receives a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal) transmitted from the gaming machine 1300. The radio signal receiving antenna 1707 receives a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal) transmitted from a radio signal transmission device installed in the hall store or in the vicinity of the hall store.

  The display 1708 is configured by, for example, a touch panel LCD, and displays various screens for instructing functions to be executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and inputting necessary information.

  The microphone 1709 and the speaker 1710 perform voice input / output under the control of the main CPU 1701 and perform voice signal processing under the control of the main CPU 1701 to enable voice calls using a mobile phone.

  The sensor 1711 is an acceleration sensor, a gyro sensor (angular velocity sensor), an optical sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like. For example, the sensor 1711 can detect the tilt, movement, and movement of the mobile terminal 1700. The number of steps moved by the user holding 1700 can also be grasped.

  The above configuration shows a typical configuration of a smartphone, but the configuration is the same for other mobile terminals such as a mobile phone, a PDA, a feature phone, a tablet terminal, and a mobile PC.

  Further, the portable terminal 1700 can be configured to incorporate a non-contact IC chip. The non-contact IC chip has its internal data read by a reader such as a non-contact IC card reader / writer. For example, a unique ID (IDm) that can identify a non-contact IC chip and data written in a storage area of the non-contact IC chip can be read out in a non-contact manner. If necessary, data can be written in a non-contact IC chip storage area in a non-contact manner.

<Hall computer configuration>
Next, the configuration of the hall computer 1200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall computer 1200.

  The hall computer 1200 includes a main CPU 1201, a ROM 1202, a RAM 1203, an external storage device 1204, a display 1205, and an interface 1206.

  The main CPU 1201 reads and executes control programs stored in the ROM 1202 and the RAM 1203. For example, the main CPU 1201 manages member information, manages the number of stored medals / stored balls and the number of owned medals / held balls for each member, and executes processing for managing the game status of each member. Then, the display 1205 is controlled.

  The display 1205 displays game data managed by the hall computer 1200, or notifies the occurrence of fraud or abnormality. The display 1205 is realized by a liquid crystal display device, for example.

  The hall computer 1200 is communicably connected to the gaming machine 1300, the sand device 1370, the island edge counter 1400, and the POS 1500 via the interface 1206. The hall computer 1200 can also be configured to connect to the information management server 1100 via the interface 1206. A control program for carrying out the present invention is stored in, for example, the external storage device 1204 and loaded into the RAM 1203. The control program can also be provided from another device via the interface 1206 or from another device outside via a network including the Internet.

  The external storage device 1204 stores a hall DB 1250 and stores member information, information on stored medals and stored balls, and the like.

<Sand equipment configuration>
Next, the configuration of the sand device 1370 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the sand device 1370. A main CPU (central processing unit) 1340 reads a control unit program stored in a ROM (read only memory) 1341, and executes processing such as medal lending. Various data relating to the processing is stored in a RAM (random access memory) 1342.

  The main CPU 1340 stores the amount data read from the information card via the information card reader / writer 1322 or the amount data read from the non-contact IC card via the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336 in the RAM 1342 as balance data. . When the amount designated by the player is smaller than the balance data based on the balance data and the operation result output from the operation unit 1334, the main CPU 1340 pays out a medal for the designated amount. The balance data is updated by counting and paying out and subtracting the amount of medals paid out from the balance data. The main CPU 1340 can drive the dispensing hopper 1345 by controlling the driving circuit 1343 and can drive the counting hopper 1346 by controlling the driving circuit 1344.

  The operation unit 1334 also displays a button for returning an information card. When the player operates this operation button, the main CPU 1340 inserts the information card inserted in the information card reader / writer 1322 into the card. It returns from the port 1332 (corresponding to the card insertion port 1332 shown in FIG. 51).

  The main CPU 1340 stores the banknote identification result output from the banknote identification device (bill validator) 1324 in the RAM 1342 as balance data. When the amount designated by the player is smaller than the balance data based on the balance data and the operation result output from the operation unit 1334, the main CPU 1340 pays out a medal for the designated amount. The balance data is updated by counting and paying out and subtracting the amount of medals paid out from the balance data.

  Further, the main CPU 1340 uses the infrared LED 1331B of the LED unit 1331 as a monitoring projector, reflects the infrared light from the infrared LED 1331B by the player, and images this with the camera 1335. The main CPU 1340 stores an image captured by the camera 1335 in the RAM 1342 and detects the presence or replacement of the player based on the image. This detection process is always performed. When the player's state changes to a non-detection (seating) state and the information card inserted from the card insertion slot 1332 remains inserted, or the banknote insertion slot 1333 (into the banknote insertion slot 1333 shown in FIG. 51) When there is a balance in the money amount data of the bill inserted from the correspondence), the main CPU 1340 alerts the player who is about to leave the seat by issuing a warning sound or warning sound via the speaker 1348. be able to. As the warning voice, a voice such as “Forgot card” is issued.

  As described above, the main CPU 1340 performs contactless communication with the contactless IC card via the contactless IC card reader / writer 1336. This communication method is, for example, an electromagnetic induction method with a carrier frequency of 13.56 MHz. The main CPU 1340 counts the number of medals according to the amount of money read from the non-contact IC card via the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1336 by the payout hopper 1345, and the medal payout tray 1337 (the medal shown in FIG. 51). The balance data of the non-contact IC card is rewritten.

  The main CPU 1340 communicates with the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1347. The number of pachinko balls and medals paid out by an information card or a non-contact IC card, and information The number of pachinko balls and medals stored in the card or non-contact IC card is periodically transmitted to the hall computer 1200.

  Further, the main CPU 1340 periodically captures the player's face image via the camera 1335 and stores it in the RAM 1342. When the face image stored last time is compared with the face image stored this time, and it is determined that they are not the same person, the main CPU 1340 determines that the player has changed, and performs processing corresponding thereto.

  As described above, the gaming machine 1300 is connected to the hall computer 1200 so that predetermined information can be transmitted, and the sand device 1370 is connected to the hall computer 1200 so that predetermined information can be transmitted and received. The hall computer 1200 receives from the gaming machine 1300 information accumulated on the number of gaming media such as pachinko ball / medal insertion information and payout information (input / output game media number information), and further displays winning information indicating the winning status and the gaming machine information. Receives operation information related to operation. Further, the hall computer 1200 receives information on the movement of pachinko balls and medals between the information card and the non-contact IC card from the sand device 1370 (information on the number of mobile game media). The face image information obtained from the player's face image and face image analysis result acquired in 1335 is received.

<Configuration of island edge counting device>
Next, the configuration of the island edge counter 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the island edge counter 1400. The main CPU 1401 reads the control program stored in the ROM 1402 and executes medal counting processing. Various data relating to the processing is stored in the RAM 1403.

  When the player operates the operation unit 1405 to instruct the start of the counting process, the main CPU 1401 drives the counting hopper 1407 by controlling the drive circuit 1406, and is inserted into the counting hopper 1407 by the player. Count medals. The counting result is printed by the printer 1404 and output as a receipt. The operation unit 1405 is, for example, a small display (touch panel type display device), and the printer 1404 is, for example, a thermal printer.

  The main CPU 1401 transmits the counting result to the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1408. Further, the main CPU 1401 can control the speaker 1409 so as to emit a warning sound or a warning sound when the player's operation is not appropriate.

  Further, the island edge counter 1400 may be provided with a non-contact IC card reader / writer or the like, and the count result may be stored in a predetermined storage medium.

<Configuration of POS>
Next, the configuration of the POS 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the POS 1500.

  The POS 1500 includes a main CPU 1501, ROM 1502, RAM 1503, information card reader / writer 1504, contactless IC card reader / writer 1505, bar code reader 1506, player side display 1507, keyboard 1508, store side display 1509, and interface 1510. ing. A speaker can also be provided.

  The main CPU 1501 reads and executes control programs stored in the ROM 1502 and the RAM 1503. For example, the main CPU 1501 executes a gift exchange process at a hall store. The control program may be provided from another device via the interface 1510 or from another device outside via a network including the Internet.

  The main CPU 1501 reads a receipt printed by the island edge counting device 1400 or the like with the bar code reader 1506, and thereby obtains a counting result (the number of acquired game media) necessary for exchanging prizes. Further, when the count result is registered in the information card or the non-contact IC card, the main CPU 1501 determines the count result (the number of game media held via the information card reader / writer 1504 or the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1505). Including).

  The player-side display 1507 is configured as a touch panel display that can be touched by a player, and the store-side display 1509 is configured as a touch panel display that can be touched by staff of a hall store. Note that the player-side display 1507 and the store-side display 1509 can be configured as a single display.

  The main CPU 1501 receives information such as prizes related to prize exchanges (general prizes and special prizes in stock at hall stores) designated by the staff via the store-side display 1509 and the keyboard 1508, and in response to this, Information regarding the number of prizes being managed and information regarding the player's game media are transmitted to the hall computer 1200 (connected via the interface 1510).

  In addition, when the main CPU 1501 includes a speaker, the main CPU 1501 can control the speaker so as to emit a warning sound or a warning sound when the player's operation is inappropriate.

<Configuration of hall management terminal>
Next, the configuration of the hall management terminal 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the hall management terminal 1600. The hall management terminal 1600 is a terminal installed in the hall store and connected to the hall computer 1200, and a predetermined operation is performed by an administrator or staff of the hall store.

  The hall management terminal 1600 includes a main CPU 1601, a ROM 1602, a RAM 1603, an external storage device 1604, a display 1605, a keyboard 1606, a mouse 1607, and an interface 1608. A speaker can also be provided.

  The main CPU 1601 reads and executes control programs stored in the ROM 1602 and the RAM 1603. For example, the main CPU 1601 executes a setting process related to a predetermined item and transmits it to the hall computer 1200 via the interface 1608. The control program may be provided from another device via the interface 1608 or from another device outside via a network including the Internet.

  The main CPU 1601 displays a screen or the like for setting related to a predetermined item on the display 1605, receives an instruction from the hall store manager or the like via the keyboard 1606 or the mouse 1607, and receives the instruction content in the hall computer 1200. Send to. The display 1605 can also be configured as a touch panel display capable of touch operation. In that case, setting processing is performed by a touch operation by a manager of a hall store or the like.

  The hall management terminal 1600 is also connected to the information management server 1100 via the hall computer 1200 and other hall store network devices, or refers to or sets the setting information managed by the information management server 1100. Can be.

<Description of functions of information management server>
Next, an overview of functions of the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a functional block diagram of the information management server 1100.

  The information management server 1100 includes a user management unit 1111, a gaming machine information management unit 1112, a map information management unit 1113, and a network I / F unit 1120. Each of these functional units is controlled by the main CPU 1101 shown in FIG.

  In addition, the information management server 1100 stores an information management DB 1150 in the external storage device 1104. The information management DB 1150 stores information for controlling whether or not a predetermined application can be executed, and information related to gaming machines. Game table information table 1152, a map information table 1153 for storing information related to the location of gaming machines, a hall distribution management table 1154 for managing hall stores and times where gaming machines are located, and door opening / closing information of gaming machines Etc., a game machine status management table 1155, a game information management table 1156 for storing the number of games of the player, game machine results, etc., a privilege management table 1157 for storing information such as game machines used by the player, AR display AR display management table 1158 for storing display marks and the like for Notification information management table 1159 stores the condition or notification information or the like, and a useful ratio information accumulation table 1160 for storing winning ratio information received from the mobile terminal 1700.

  The user management unit 1111 refers to the user information table 1151 when the user downloads an application to be executed on the mobile terminal 1700 from a predetermined server, or when the downloaded application is executed on the mobile terminal 1700. The user's authority is confirmed, and when the user's authority is confirmed, download and execution of the application are permitted.

  The gaming machine information management unit 1112 refers to the gaming machine information table 1152 in response to a request from the portable terminal 1700, and provides the portable terminal 1700 with a gaming machine number or the like corresponding to the gaming machine ID received from the portable terminal 1700. .

  The map information management unit 1113 refers to the map information table 1153 in response to a request from the mobile terminal 1700, and provides the mobile terminal 1700 with information related to the arrangement position corresponding to the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700.

  The gaming machine distribution management unit 1114 stores the gaming machine ID received from the portable terminal 1700 in association with the hall ID or the like, thereby enabling distribution management of the gaming machine 1300.

  The gaming machine status management unit 1115 stores the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operation time information received from the portable terminal 1700 in association with each other, and can manage the status of the gaming machine 1300 regarding security, quality, and maintenance. To do.

  The game information management unit 1116 stores the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with the application ID, the total number of games, and the gaming information, and enables management of the gaming history in the gaming machine 1300 of the player.

  The privilege management unit 1117 stores the gaming machine ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 in association with the application ID and the total number of games, and gives a specification to the player who played the game on the gaming machine 1300.

  The AR display management unit 1118 receives the gaming machine ID received from the portable terminal 1700, determines a display mark to be displayed on the portable terminal 1700 and a display mode thereof according to the gaming machine ID, and provides the portable terminal 1700 with the display mark. . Here, AR (Augmented Reality) means, for example, a display of the portable terminal 1700 by combining a virtual object such as the display mark described above with an image in an actual hall store taken by a camera. This is a technique for providing a video with an expanded reality to the user.

  The notification information management unit 1119 receives the notification ID received from the mobile terminal 1700 together with the application ID, determines the notification information corresponding to the notification ID according to the application ID and the like, and determines the determined notification information as the mobile terminal 1700. To provide.

  A network I / F (interface) unit 1120 is connected to a network and controls data transmission / reception with a partner computer. Here, the network can be configured as a network including the Internet and a wireless network (the same applies to the network I / F unit of other devices, and thus the description of the subsequent network I / F unit is omitted). .

<Functional explanation of mobile terminal>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, an outline of functions of the mobile terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 61 is a functional block diagram of mobile terminal 1700.

  The portable terminal 1700 includes, as application function units, a role information display control unit 1721, a gaming machine distribution information transmission unit 1722, a gaming machine status transmission unit 1723, a gaming information control unit 1724, a privilege control unit 1725, an AR display control unit 1726, A notification information display control unit 1727 and a wireless communication control unit 1728 are included. The mobile terminal 1700 includes a beacon receiving unit 1731, a display control unit 1732, an input control unit 1733, and a network I / F unit 1734 as functions of the OS. Each of these functional units is controlled by a main CPU 1701 shown in FIG.

  The role ratio information display control unit 1721 sequentially displays the gaming machine number of the gaming machine 1300 to be inspected based on the signal strength of the beacon signal received from the beacon receiving unit 1731 described later, and further included in the beacon signal. The ratio information to be displayed is controlled to be displayed for each gaming machine.

  The gaming machine distribution information transmission unit 1722 transmits the gaming machine ID from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the hall ID and the like.

  The gaming machine status transmission unit 1723 transmits the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operation time information received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100.

  The gaming information control unit 1724 transmits the gaming machine ID, the total number of games, and the gaming information received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID, and manages the gaming information of the player identified by the application ID. Received from the server 1100 and displayed.

  The privilege control unit 1725 transmits the gaming machine ID and the total number of games received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID, and displays the result of the privilege granted by the information management server 1100.

  The AR display control unit 1726 transmits the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine 1300 to the information management server 1100, and receives the display mark corresponding to the gaming machine ID received from the information management server 1100 and the display mode thereof. AR display is performed on the display of the portable terminal 1700.

  The notification information display control unit 1727 transmits the notification ID received from the wireless signal transmission device 1800 together with the application ID to the information management server 1100, and receives and displays the notification information determined according to the notification ID from the information management server 1100. To do.

  When receiving wireless signals from a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900, wireless communication control unit 1728 shifts communication with wireless signal transmission device 1900, which is estimated to be the shortest distance, from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication. Control as follows.

  The beacon receiving unit 1731 receives a beacon signal transmitted from each of the gaming machines 1300 by the wireless signal receiving antenna 1707 shown in FIG. 54, and receives the received gaming machine ID, role ratio information, and the like, for example, API ( It is provided to the role ratio information display control unit 1721 by Application Programming Interface.

  The display control unit 1732 displays an input / instruction screen that can be operated by the user of the mobile terminal 1700 and a display screen of the role information regarding the functions and the like realized by the role information display control unit 1721. Control is performed so as to display in 1708.

  The input control unit 1733 detects a user instruction / operation / input with a touch sensor on the input / instruction screen displayed on the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700, and transmits the detection result to the main CPU 1701.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63, various tables for storing data used in the information management system 1001 will be described.

  FIG. 62A shows an example of the user information table 1151. The user information table 1151 includes a user ID, name, affiliation, and password. The user managed in the user information table 1151 is, for example, an inspector who is given authority to inspect the gaming machine 1300.

  FIG. 62B shows an example of the gaming machine information table 1152. The gaming machine information table 1152 includes a hall ID, a gaming machine ID, and a gaming machine number. Therefore, in the gaming machine information table 1152, the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine number is managed for each hall store. The gaming machine ID is an identifier provided from the gaming machine 1300, and is an identifier that allows the gaming machine 1300 to be individually identified (at least individually in the hall store). For example, the ID managed by the main control circuit 70 described above, the ID stored in the BLE module 49 that transmits the role ratio information and the like by a beacon signal, and the like can be used as the gaming machine ID.

  The gaming machine number is a number assigned to the gaming machine 1300, and is also an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300 at least in the hall store. It is desirable that the gaming machine number is displayed at a position that is easily visible when the inspector views the gaming machine 1300 from the front.

  FIG. 63 shows an example of the map information table 1153. The map information table 1153 includes a gaming machine ID, a gaming machine position, a size, and a beacon transmission position. The game machine position represents, for example, a relative position from a predetermined reference point of the floor of the hall store, and can be configured to have information indicating the floor number of the floor. The size is the horizontal (X-axis direction) and vertical (Y-axis direction) when the gaming machine 1300 is viewed from above. The beacon transmission position relatively indicates which position of the gaming machine 1300 the position where the beacon signal is transmitted (for example, the position of the antenna of the BLE chip 49d) (for example, the gaming machine 1300 is turned up). The upper left when viewed from is the reference point). In the map information table 1153 of FIG. 63, the units of length are all centimeters.

  63, only the position information related to the gaming machine 1300 is stored in the map information table 1153, but the arrangement position of other devices such as the island edge counting device 1400 and the POS 1500 is also stored. Can do. Having such data enables the portable terminal 1700 to display a device other than the gaming machine 1300 when the hall store layout is displayed. The location information stored in the map information table 1153 can be created based on, for example, a device layout diagram in the store that the hall needs to submit to the jurisdiction to obtain business permission.

<Arrangement of game machines etc. in hall stores>
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the layout in the hall store will be described. FIG. 64 is a sketch (layout diagram) schematically illustrating how devices such as the gaming machine 1300 are arranged in the main area of the hall store.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the illustrated hall store, two front doors (2011a, 2011b) are provided on the lower side of the figure, and a player enters and exits the hall store through these doors. In front of the front doorway (2011a, 2011b) is a front passage, and four islands (2035-2038) are arranged in the back (upper side of the drawing). Each island includes eight gaming machines 13000. Four sets of two gaming machines 1300 are arranged facing each other, and the front portion of the gaming machine 1300 is directed to the aisle side.

  Three inner passages are provided between the four islands (2035 to 2038) described above, and outer passages are provided on the left side of the island 2035 and on the right side of the island 2038, respectively. In addition, large viewers 2021a are respectively arranged at the lower ends of the island 2035 and the island 2037) so that a player who has entered the store can easily check the product information, hall store guide information, and the like. In addition, an island edge counter 1400 is disposed at each of the upper ends of the island 2035 and the island 2038.

  Further to the above-described four islands (2035 to 2038) (upper side in the drawing), islands (2031, 2033) are arranged on the left side, and islands (2032, 2034) are arranged on the right side. As with the four islands (2035 to 2038), each island includes eight gaming machines 1300, and four sets of two gaming machines 1300 are arranged facing each other. As illustrated, the gaming machines 1300 on these islands (2031 to 2034) are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the gaming machines 1300 on the four islands (2035 to 2038) described above.

  An inner passage is provided between the left islands (2031, 2033) and the right islands (2032, 2034). Further, the above-described outer passages extend on the left side of the left islands (2031, 2033) and on the right side of the right islands (2032, 2034), respectively.

  A large viewer 2021a is disposed at the left end of the island 2031 and an island end counter 1400 is disposed at the right end. At the right end of the island 2033, a small viewer 2021b is arranged.

  An island edge counter 1400 is disposed at the left end of the island 2032. A large viewer 2021a is disposed at the right end of the island 2034.

  Further deeper in the islands (2031 to 2034) (upper side of the drawing), a prize exchange counter 2016 is arranged on the left side, and a storefront gift display corner 2017 is arranged on the right side. Further, a staff room entrance 2014 is provided at the back left side of the gift exchange counter 2016, and a restroom entrance 2012 is provided at the left side of the gift exchange counter 2016. In addition, a break room entrance 2013 is provided in front of the store gift display corner 2017 on the right side. Further, a computer room entrance 2015 is provided in the back of the prize exchange counter 2016 (upper side in the drawing). In the computer room, computers such as the hall computer 1200, the hall DB 1250, and the hall management terminal 1600 described above are installed.

  In the back of the prize exchange counter 2016 (upper side of the drawing), the staff of the hall store is waiting to respond to a request for a prize exchange by the player. As shown in the figure, two POS 1500 are placed on the gift exchange counter 2016.

  Here, in the vicinity of the front doorway 2011a, the inspector 2001 is shown moving upward in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036 for the inspection of the gaming machine 1300.

  Also, a reference point 2002 is provided at the uppermost left end of FIG. 64, and in this embodiment, the gaming machine table position of the map information table 1153 described above is set with reference to this reference point 2002.

  As described above, the sand device 1370 is arranged beside the gaming machine 1300 of the present embodiment, but is omitted here for convenience of explanation regarding the role information display control described later.

<Description of role information display control processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an outline of the role ratio information display control process executed in the portable terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 65 is an enlarged view schematically showing the periphery of the inspector 2001 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 65, four gaming machines (1300-1 to 1300-4) are arranged in the left column of the island 2035, and four gaming machines (1300-5 to 1300) are arranged in the right column of the island 2035. -8) is arranged, and each gaming machine 1300 (1300-1 to 1300-8) is arranged so that the passage side is the front. Similarly, four gaming machines (1300-9 to 1300-12) are arranged in the left column of the island 2036, and four gaming machines (1300-13 to 1300-16) are arranged in the right column of the island 2036. Arranged, each gaming machine 1300 (1300-9 to 1300-16) is arranged such that the passage side is the front.

  FIG. 65 shows an inspection portable terminal 1700 held by an inspector 2001 of the gaming machine 1300.

  The triangular marks shown in the respective gaming machines 1300 (1300-1 to 1300-16) indicate the positions of the wireless signal transmission circuits such as the BLE module 49. Here, wireless signals are respectively transmitted from the center of the triangle. (For example, a beacon signal) is transmitted.

  For example, when a Bluetooth (registered trademark) -based beacon signal based on the BLE standard is transmitted by the BLE chip 49d described above, the radio wave arrival distance differs depending on the set class. Specifically, the maximum is 100 m for Class 1, the maximum is 10 m for Class 2, and the maximum is 1 m for Class 3 (the distance is a standard value).

  In the present embodiment, for example, Class 2 or Class 3 can be adopted. The class of each gaming machine 1300 is set in common on at least the floor of the hall store. In FIG. 65, regarding the island 2035, the circle 2000-3 centered on the wireless signal transmission position (triangle center) of the gaming machine 1300-3 and the wireless signal transmission position (triangle center) of the gaming machine 1300-4 are shown. The circle 2000-4 centered on the circle, the radio signal transmission position (triangle center) of the gaming machine 1300-7, and the circle 2000-7, the radio signal transmission position (triangle center) of the gaming machine 1300-8. A circle 2000-8 is shown in the center. This is a schematic illustration of how a wireless signal propagates from the wireless signal transmission circuit and reaches the portable terminal 1700. However, it does not indicate the radio wave reach distance or the position of the same signal strength.

  Radio waves transmitted from the radio signal transmission circuit are reflected everywhere, and the reflected radio waves overlap each other and interfere with each other, and the nearby players and inspectors themselves have an influence on reflection, etc. It does not propagate with signal strength in the direction.

  In FIG. 65, as with the island 2035, the island 2036 also has a circle 2000-11 centered on the radio signal transmission position (the center of the triangle) of the gaming machine 1300-11 and the radio signal transmission of the gaming machine 1300-12. Circle 2000-12 centered on the position (the center of the triangle), radio signal transmission of the gaming machine 1300-15 Circle 2000-15 centered on the position of the gaming machine 1300-15, Radio signal transmission of the gaming machine 1300-16 A circle 2000-16 centered on the position (the center of the triangle) is shown.

  In such a situation, the mobile terminal 1700 receives wireless signals from each gaming machine 1300, and controls to display the gaming machine ID and role ratio information included in each wireless signal on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. To do.

  Here, the portable terminal 1700 can control the display order in accordance with the signal strength at the time of reception. For example, in the case of receiving a beacon signal based on the BLE standard, it is evaluated that the signal strength (RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)) is in order from the information of the gaming machine corresponding to the radio signal having a large signal strength (that is, close to the portable terminal 1700 (In order from the gaming machine 1300).

  In addition, in the BLE standard, proximity (Proximity: Immediate (very close), Near (near), Far (far))) can be obtained based on the strength (TxPower) of the signal emitted by the beacon and RSSI. Depending on the proximity, the order of the gaming machines 1300 that display the role ratio information and the like may be controlled.

  Furthermore, in the BLE standard, accuracy can be obtained, so that the gaming machines 1300 having the same proximity can be further classified using this accuracy. Here, the accuracy indicates a variation in the estimated distance when the estimated distance is obtained several times based on the signal intensity and TxPower.

  FIG. 66A shows a role information display screen 3001 displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 in the situation of FIG.

  In the role ratio information display screen 3001, a game machine number (display is “machine number”) = “1300-12” is displayed (reference numeral 3003), and this corresponds to information of the game machine 1300-12. A role ratio information display unit 3004 is expanded in a pull-down manner below the gaming machine number, and information including role ratio information of the gaming machines 1300-12 is displayed here. In the role ratio information display section 3004, a gaming machine ID (display is “ID”), the total number of games, an advantageous section ratio, a continuous bonus rate (cumulative), a bonus rate (cumulative), and a continuous bonus rate (6000G) , An accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

  Also, in this example, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is 75%, which exceeds a predetermined threshold value. Therefore, in order to attract the attention of the inspector 2001, for example, it is displayed in red (see FIG. In FIG. 66A, a rectangular frame 3005 is displayed for convenience).

  Other gaming machines 1300 are displayed on the lower side of the role ratio information display section 3004 (reference numeral 3006). These gaming machines 1300 are listed from the top in ascending order of the estimated distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300. Has been. For example, as shown in FIG. 66A, gaming machine 1300-12, gaming machine 1300-8, gaming machine 1300-11, gaming machine 1300-4, gaming machine 1300-16, gaming machine 1300-7, gaming machine 1300-3 Are displayed in the order of gaming machines 1300-15.

  Further, by operating a scroll bar 3002 disposed at the right end of the role ratio information display screen 3001, it is possible to display a list of gaming machines 1300 that are further distant from the portable terminal 1700.

  Here, when the inspector 2001 touches the display portion of the gaming machine 1300-8 to the gaming machine 1300-15, the role ratio information displayed on the role ratio information display unit 3004 for the gaming machine 1300-12, etc. Is displayed for the target gaming machine (below the display portion).

  The display order of such gaming machines 1300 corresponds to the estimated distance between the portable terminal 1700 and each gaming machine 1300 shown in FIG. 65 (note that reflection, interference, etc. of radio signals are considered here). Absent). The distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300-12 that has the closest estimated distance is indicated by an arrow A1 in FIG.

  If the inspector 2001 moves and the distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 changes when the inspector 2001 moves, the display order of the gaming machine 1300 on the role ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A is changed accordingly. Become.

  Also, in the example of the role ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, a request is made to the information management server 1100 based on the gaming machine ID received from the gaming machine 1300 by a wireless signal, and the corresponding gaming machine number is acquired. , It is displayed as a “unit number”. The inspector 2001 recognizes that the role information of the gaming machine 1300 is displayed on the role information display screen 3001 in association with the display of the “device number” and the actual machine number of the gaming machine 1300. can do. However, even without accessing the information management server 1100 and displaying the machine number, the inspector 2001 makes the portable terminal 1700 sufficiently close to the gaming machine 1300 so that the role ratio information and the like of which gaming machine 1300 can be obtained. It can be recognized whether it is displayed at the top of the role information display screen 3001.

  In the example of the role ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, since the corresponding game machine number is acquired from the information management server 1100 as described above, all the games on the floor of the hall store are simultaneously acquired. The gaming machine ID list (list including the corresponding gaming machine number) of the machine 1300 is acquired. Therefore, by operating the scroll bar 3002, it is possible to display a list including the gaming machines 1300 that have not yet received the role ratio information. At this time, in the present embodiment, the list of gaming machine IDs of the gaming machines 1300 acquired from the information management server 1100 is compared with the gaming machine ID that has received the ratio information, and the gaming machine 1300 that has received the ratio information. And the display mode related to the gaming machine 1300 that has not yet received the role ratio information can be set differently. For example, the display color of the gaming machine number of the gaming machine 1300 that has received the role ratio information can be controlled to be different from the display color of the gaming machine number of the gaming machine 1300 that has not yet received the role information. . By such control, the gaming machine 1300 that has not received the role ratio information can be easily identified, and the occurrence of the role ratio information acquisition omission can be avoided.

  The role ratio information display screen 3011 shown in FIG. 66B is displayed in the same situation as the role ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A, but is displayed in a mode different from the role ratio information display screen 3001. .

  That is, the role ratio information of each gaming machine 1300 is developed from the beginning, not the pull-down method. Here too, the gaming machines 1300 are displayed in the order from the mobile terminal 1700.

  For example, on the role information display screen 3011, a game machine number (display is “machine number”) = “1300-12” is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3013), and this corresponds to the information of the game machine 1300-12. Yes. A gaming machine information display section 3014 is expanded under the gaming machine number, and information including role ratio information of the gaming machines 1300-12 is displayed here. The gaming machine information display unit 3014 includes a gaming machine ID (display is “ID”), the total number of games, an advantageous section ratio, a continuous bonus rate (cumulative), a bonus rate (cumulative), and a continuous bonus rate (6000 G). , An accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

  In this example, as in FIG. 66A, the value of the accessory ratio (cumulative) is 75%, which exceeds a predetermined threshold value. In order to attract the attention of the inspector 2001, for example, in red It is displayed (in FIG. 66B, it is displayed with a rectangular frame 3015 for convenience).

  Below the gaming machine information display unit 3014, gaming machine number (display is “daining number”) = “1300-8” (reference numeral 3016) is displayed, which corresponds to the information of the gaming machine 1300-8. . The gaming machine 1300-8 is a gaming machine that has a short estimated distance from the portable terminal 1700 after the gaming machine 1300-12. Further, a gaming machine information display unit 3017 is developed under the gaming machine number, and information including role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300-8 is displayed here. In the gaming machine information display unit 3017, a gaming machine ID (display is “ID”), total number of games, advantageous section ratio, continuous bonus rate (cumulative), bonus rate (cumulative), continuous bonus rate (6000G) , An accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

  Further, in this example, the value of the advantageous section ratio is 70% and the value of the continuous character ratio (cumulative) is 62%, which exceeds the predetermined threshold values, respectively, so that the inspector 2001 is attracted. For example, it is displayed in red (in FIG. 66B, it is displayed with rectangular frames 3018 and 3019 for convenience).

  In addition, by operating a scroll bar 3012 arranged at the right end of the role ratio information display screen 3011, it is possible to display a list of gaming machines 1300 that are further distant from the portable terminal 1700.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the process in the case of displaying the role information display screen 3001 of FIG. 66A in the portable terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the role information display control process for displaying the role information display screen 3001 on the portable terminal 1700. In FIG. 67, the processing flow of the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  The role information display control process can be executed by, for example, downloading a specified application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. In addition, since the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped by the application, it is desirable to perform predetermined user authentication when the application is downloaded or activated.

  First, in the mobile terminal 1700, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received (S3001). When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal is not received (when S3001 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal has been received (when S3001 is YES), it decodes the received radio signal to obtain a UUID (S3002). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S3003). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S3003 is NO), the process returns to S3001 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (YES in S3003), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S3004). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a machine number (game machine number) corresponding to the gaming machine ID has been acquired (S3005).

  When the main CPU 1701 has already acquired the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID (in the case of YES determination in S3005), the process proceeds to S3010. Here, in the case where the mobile terminal 1700 acquires the total number of games from the gaming machine 1300, the value of the total number of games is the same as the value acquired last time for the gaming machine 1300 (game machine ID). If it is, it can be determined that there is no need to change the display of the role ratio information, and control can be performed so as to return to the processing of S3001 and receive a radio signal.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 1701 has not acquired the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID (NO determination in S3005), the gaming machine information request including the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the information management server 1100, and this gaming machine A machine number corresponding to the machine ID is requested (S3006).

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives a gaming machine information request from the portable terminal 1700, it refers to the gaming machine information table 1152 and acquires a machine number corresponding to the received gaming machine ID (S3007). Next, the main CPU 1101 transmits the acquired machine number to the portable terminal 1700 (S3008).

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives the serial number from the information management server 1100 (S3009), or when YES is determined in S3005, the main CPU 1701 acquires RSSI from the decoded radio signal (S3010). Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires role ratio information and the like from the decoded wireless signal (S3011).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 edits the ratio information display data for displaying the ratio information display screen (for example, the ratio information display screen 3001 in FIG. 66A) based on the machine number, RSSI, ratio information, and the like. (S3012). Next, the main CPU 1701 controls to display the role information display screen based on the edited role information display data (S3013).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not there has been a user (inspector) operation during the display of the role ratio information display screen (S3014). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there has been a display change instruction (for example, pull-down display or scroll bar operation) by the user during display of the role information display screen (when S3014 is “display change instruction”), the main CPU 1701 However, the process proceeds to S3012, where the role information display data is edited again according to the display change instruction. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is no operation by the user during the display of the role information display screen (when S3014 is NO), the main CPU 1701 performs the process of S3001, further receives a radio signal, The role ratio information display screen is updated based on the result.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is an end instruction from the user during display of the role information display screen (when S3014 is “end instruction”), the main CPU 1701 ends this role information display control process.

  In the example of FIG. 67, each time a new gaming machine ID is found, the corresponding machine number is requested to the information management server 1100. However, the hall to be inspected at the download timing or login timing of the application. The hall ID corresponding to the store is input (or acquired when connected to a network device in the hall store), and at that time, the machine number of the gaming machine 1300 related to the hall store is downloaded collectively. May be.

  Further, as described above, it is also possible to configure so that the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID is not requested to the information management server 1100 and the machine number is not displayed.

  The role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68 is the role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in a mode different from that in FIGS. 66A and 66B.

  A gaming machine icon display unit 3022 is displayed at the top of the role ratio information display screen 3021, and a role ratio information display unit 3026 is displayed at the bottom of the role ratio information display screen 3021.

  A gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the estimated distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 is displayed on the gaming machine icon display portion 3022. On the right side of the gaming machine icon display portion 3022, numbers such as “20”, “40”, “60”, “80”, “100” (unit is centimeter) are shown, and these represent the estimated distance. . Each gaming machine icon 3024 indicates the machine number of the corresponding gaming machine, and is controlled to be displayed on the upper part of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 as the estimated distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 is longer.

  In addition, in the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 shown in FIG. 68, the display area is divided every 20 centimeters. However, when a plurality of gaming machines 1300 belong to the same division, the estimation with the portable terminal 1700 is performed. A gaming machine icon 3024 of the gaming machine 1300 having a short distance is displayed on the left side. Therefore, in the GUI of the role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG. 68, the gaming machine 1300 located on the left side of the inspector 2001 may not be shown as being located on the left side of the role ratio information display screen 3021. become.

  Actually, the gaming machine 1300-12 and gaming machine 1300-8 displayed in the 40-60 centimeter section of the gaming machine icon display section 3022 show the positional relationship between the left and right sides as shown in FIG. Has been.

  In the 80-100 cm section of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the gaming machine 1300-4, the gaming machine 1300-16, the gaming machine 1300-7, and the gaming machine 1300-3 are displayed. Icons corresponding to two gaming machines are shown, and the other two are displayed by horizontal scrolling.

  In addition, the scroll bar 3023 can display the game machine icons 3024 in a farther section.

  Here, when a gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300-12 is touched (arrow 3025), role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300-12 is displayed on the role ratio information display unit 3026. The role ratio information and the like of the gaming machine 1300-12 displayed here are the same as the contents shown in the role ratio information display section 3004 in FIG. 66A.

  FIG. 69 shows a further improvement of the display control on the role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG.

  69A shows a part of the island 2035 and the island 2036 shown in FIG. 65, and in the same way as that shown in FIG. 65, the inspector 2001 carries it in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036. A terminal 1700 is held. Here, FIG. 69A shows a situation (arrow A2) in which the inspector 2001 has moved the mobile terminal 1700 to the left side.

  In such a case, the mobile terminal 1700 detects the moving direction of the mobile terminal 1700 using a sensor 1711 (for example, a gyro sensor) and changes in the signal strength of the radio signal received from each gaming machine 1300 (ie, And how the signal strength of the radio signal from each gaming machine 1300 changes before and after the movement of the portable terminal 1700).

  Based on the above analysis result, the portable terminal 1700 arranges the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 having the increased signal strength on the left side with respect to the gaming machine icon 3024 displayed in the same section of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022. Conversely, a gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to a gaming machine 1300 whose signal strength has decreased or a gaming machine 1300 whose signal strength has increased but has changed more greatly is arranged on the left side. Control.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 69B, the gaming machine 1300 that is actually located on the left side of the inspector 2001 is also displayed on the left side in the GUI of the role information display screen 3021. For example, the gaming machine 1300-12 and the gaming machine 1300-8 displayed in the section of 40 to 60 centimeters of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 are shown on the left side as shown in FIG. Has been.

  In the 80-100 cm section of the gaming machine icon display unit 3022, the gaming machine 1300-4, the gaming machine 1300-16, the gaming machine 1300-7, and the gaming machine 1300-3 are displayed. As can be seen, the gaming machine 1300-4 and the gaming machine 1300-3 located on the left are displayed on the gaming machine icon display unit 3022 as the two gaming machines on the left.

  FIG. 70 is a further improvement of the display control on the role ratio information display screen 3021 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70A shows a part of the island 2035 and the island 2036 shown in FIG. 65. Similarly to the one shown in FIG. 65, the inspector 2001 carries it in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036. A terminal 1700 is held. Here, FIG. 70 shows a situation (arrow A3) in which the inspector 2001 holds the portable terminal 1700 and goes straight through the inner passage.

  In such a case, the mobile terminal 1700 changes the signal strength of the radio signal received from each gaming machine 1300 (that is, the signal strength of the radio signal from each gaming machine 1300 before and after the mobile terminal 1700 moves). How it changed).

  Here, as shown in the role ratio information display screen 3031 in FIG. 70B, the mobile terminal 1700 divides the gaming machine icon display portion into a front display portion 3032 and a rear display portion 3033, and sets a category corresponding to the estimated distance for each. To do. Then, the mobile terminal 1700 arranges the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 whose signal strength has increased (that is, approached) from the above analysis result on the front display unit 3032, and conversely, the signal strength is Control is performed so that the gaming machine icon 3024 corresponding to the gaming machine 1300 that has become smaller (that is, farther away) is arranged in the rear display unit 3033. In this way, the portable terminal 1700 controls the display position of the gaming machine icon 3024 in accordance with the change in the proximity.

  Due to such display control, in FIG. 66A, FIG. 66B, FIG. 68, and FIG. 69, the gaming machine displayed just based on the estimated distance between the gaming machine 1300 and the portable terminal 1700 (regardless of the forward direction or the backward direction). The icon 3024 is displayed depending on whether the icon 3024 is positioned before or after the inspector 2001.

  For example, on the role information display screen 3031 shown in FIG. 70B, the gaming machine 1300 that is behind the inspector 2001 by the movement of the inspector 2001 as shown in FIG. 70A is changed to the gaming machine 1300-7, gaming machine 1300-. 11, gaming machine 1300-8, gaming machine 1300-15, gaming machine 1300-3, gaming machine 1300-16, gaming machine 1300-12, gaming machine 1300-4, and these are estimated distances Arranged in order. Similarly, it can be easily understood that the gaming machine 1300 in front of the inspector 2001 is the gaming machine 1300-10, the gaming machine 1300-6, the gaming machine 1300-2, and the gaming machine 13000-14. Arranged in order of distance.

  Here, the portable terminal 1700 uses the sensor 1711 (for example, an acceleration sensor or a gyro sensor) to determine the number of steps, estimates the moving distance of the portable terminal 1700, and takes the estimated moving distance into consideration. The ratio information display screen 3031 can also be displayed.

  The role ratio information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71 acquires the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300 in the hall store as map information, and displays the role ratio information from the map information and the contents of the radio signal received from each gaming machine 1300. The screen is edited and displayed.

  On the role ratio information display screen 3041 in FIG. 71, a hall store gaming machine 1300 and a portable terminal 1700 are displayed on the map display unit 3042, and a map display is made by operating the scroll bar 3043 at the left end and the scroll bar 3044 at the bottom. The position displayed on the part 3042 can be moved within the hall store.

  In the example of FIG. 71, the map display unit 3042 displays the island 2035 and a part of the gaming machines 1300 of the island 2036 shown in FIG. 65, and the portable terminal 1700 is displayed as an image 1700a. Further, the position of the portable terminal 1700 (for example, the position of a wireless signal receiving circuit such as the BLE chip 49d) is indicated as a position 1700b.

  As described above, the portable terminal 1700 can receive a radio signal from each gaming machine 1300 and can estimate the distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300 from the signal strength or the like. Since the position of each gaming machine 1300 in the hall store is grasped, the position of the portable terminal 1700 can be estimated from the signal strength of the radio signal received from at least three gaming machines 1300, and the map information and the estimated Based on the position of the portable terminal 1700, the map display unit 3042 can be displayed.

  As the map information, the map information table 1153 shown in FIG. 63 indicates how far the upper left point of the gaming machine 1300 is from the predetermined reference point of the hall store (for example, the reference point 2002 in FIG. 64). The beacon transmission position indicating the position of the gaming machine, the size of the gaming machine 1300, and the position of the radio signal transmission circuit of the gaming machine 1300 can be acquired.

  For each gaming machine 1300, the display position in the map display unit 3042 is determined from the map information. For example, an image 1300-8a showing the gaming machine 1300-8 and an image 1300-8b of the wireless signal transmission circuit are edited. Then, based on the signal strength of the wireless signal received by the portable terminal 1700 from the gaming machine 1300-8, the distance between the gaming machine 1300-8 and the portable terminal 1700 (indicated by the dotted line 1300-8c) is estimated. Is done. Next, if a circle with a radius indicated by reference numeral 1300-8c is drawn around the image 1300-8b of the wireless signal transmission circuit, a circle indicated by reference numeral 1300-8d is obtained.

  Such a circle is similarly drawn on the gaming machine 1300-11 and the gaming machine 1300-12, and the position where the three circles intersect is 1700b. Based on this position, an image 1700a representing the mobile terminal 1700 is obtained. Edited.

  By performing the above editing each time the portable terminal 1700 moves, the map display unit 3042 of the role information display screen 3041 displays such that the portable terminal 1700 moves in the inner passage between the island 2035 and the island 2036. Is realized.

  In this example, three gaming machines 1300 for forming three circles are selected in the order of the short distance from the mobile terminal 1700 (that is, the received signal strength is large), but this is not limitative. It is not something. It is also possible to select four or more gaming machines 1300 and estimate the intersection (or approaching point) as the position of the mobile terminal 1700.

  In FIG. 71, the radius is indicated by reference numeral 1300-8c with the dotted line (reference numeral 1300-8c) indicating the distance between the gaming machine 1300-8 and the portable terminal 1700 and the image 1300-8b of the wireless signal transmission circuit as the center. The circle of the distance (reference numeral 1300-8d) is a display for explanation and does not need to be shown as a GUI (the same applies to the gaming machine 1300-11 and the gaming machine 1300-12).

  When the user touches an image showing the gaming machine 1300 (for example, an image 1300-8a showing the gaming machine 1300-8) on the map display unit 3042 of the role information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71, the ratio information shown in FIG. As shown in the display screen 3051, the role ratio information corresponding to the touched gaming machine 1300 is displayed.

  Further, for example, the display mode (for example, display color) of the gaming machine 1300 that has received the role ratio information is different from the display mode (for example, display color) of the gaming machine 1300 that has not yet received the role ratio information. Can be controlled. By such control, the gaming machine 1300 that has not received the role ratio information can be easily identified, and the occurrence of the role ratio information acquisition omission can be avoided.

  In the role information display screen 3051 of FIG. 72, the game machine number (display is “machine number”) = “1300-8” is displayed at the top (reference numeral 3052), and the gaming machine information display unit 3053 is displayed below it. Here, information including role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300-8 is displayed. The gaming machine information display unit 3053 includes a gaming machine ID (display is “ID”), total number of games, advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio (cumulative), character ratio (cumulative), continuous character ratio (6000 G). , An accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

  A return button 3054 is displayed at the bottom of the role information display screen 3051. When the user touches this button, the display on the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700 returns to the role information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a process when displaying the role information display screen 3041 of FIG. 71 on the portable terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the role information display control process for displaying the role information display screen 3041 on the portable terminal 1700. Further, in FIG. 73, the processing flow of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  The role information display control process can be executed by, for example, downloading a specified application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. In addition, since the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped by the application, it is desirable to perform predetermined user authentication when the application is downloaded or activated.

  First, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 transmits a map information request to the information management server 1100 to request map information regarding the hall store to be inspected (S3031). The hall ID corresponding to the hall store can be specified by the user at the time of downloading or starting up the application or at the start of the role information display control process (can also be acquired when connected to a network device in the hall store). . It is also possible to further specify a specific floor of the hall store.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives a map information request from the portable terminal 1700, the gaming machine information table 1152 is referenced to identify a gaming machine ID corresponding to the hall ID of the received hall store and obtain a machine number. Further, the map information table 1153 is referred to obtain map information of each gaming machine ID (S3032). Next, the main CPU 1101 transmits the acquired machine number and map information to the portable terminal 1700 (S3033).

  Next, in the portable terminal 1700, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received (S3034). When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal is not received (when S3034 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal has been received (S3034: YES), the received CPU receives a UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S3035). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S3036). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S3036 is NO), the process returns to S3034 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (S3036 is YES), the RSSI is acquired from the decoded radio signal (S3037). Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires role ratio information and the like from the decoded wireless signal (S3038).

  Next, in the mobile terminal 1700, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (S3039). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (when S3039 is NO), the process proceeds to S3044. When the main CPU 1701 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (when S3039 is YES), for example, the RSSI values grasped in association with the gaming machine ID are compared, and the RSSI values are in descending order (that is, In order of close proximity to the portable terminal 1700, the three gaming machines 1300 are selected, and the position of the portable terminal is estimated based on the distance between each gaming machine 1300 and the portable terminal 1700 estimated using RSSI or the like (S3040). .

  Next, the main CPU 1701 develops a map image based on the received map information related to the gaming machine 1300, the estimated position of the mobile terminal, and the like (S3041). After that, the main CPU 1701 displays role ratio information for displaying a role ratio information display screen (for example, the role ratio information display screen 3041 shown in FIG. 71) based on the developed map image, machine number, and role ratio information. Data is edited (S3042). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 controls to display the role information display screen based on the role information display data (S3043).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not there has been a user (inspector) operation while the role ratio information display screen is displayed (S3044). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is a display change instruction (for example, touch of an image corresponding to the gaming machine 1300) by the user while the role ratio information display screen is displayed (when S3044 is “display change instruction”), The main CPU 1701 proceeds to the process of S3042, where the role information display data is edited again in response to the display change instruction. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is no operation by the user during the display of the role information display screen (when S3044 is NO), the main CPU 1701 performs the processing of S3034, further receives a radio signal, The role ratio information display screen is updated based on the result.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is an end instruction from the user during display of the role information display screen (when S3044 is “end instruction”), the main CPU 1701 ends the role information display control process.

  In the example of FIG. 73, the information management server 1100 is accessed to acquire the gaming machine ID of the hall store, the machine number corresponding to the gaming machine ID, and the layout (map information) of each gaming machine in the hall store. However, for example, at the timing of download or login of the application, the hall ID corresponding to the hall store to be inspected is input, and at that time, the gaming machine ID, machine number, and map information related to the hall store May be configured to be downloaded in a batch.

  In the present embodiment, the distance between the gaming machine 1300 and the portable terminal 1700 is estimated based on the signal strength of the received signal such as RSSI. However, the signal strength acquired by the reflection or interference of the radio signal has an error or instability. (Dispersion) occurs. In order to deal with such errors and instabilities, an average over a predetermined time can be obtained, or a low-pass filter can be used to remove an extreme increase or decrease in signal strength as noise.

  Next, still another method of the role ratio information display control process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing variations in timing of transmitting a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal) in the wireless signal transmission circuit of the gaming machine 1300.

  74A shows a wireless signal transmission pattern in the first row of gaming machines on the island 2035 (a row including the gaming machine 1300-1 to gaming machine 1300-4 (see FIG. 65)). In the BLE standard, the transmission of advertisement packets) is repeated 50 times (ie, 1 second) at 20 ms intervals (advertisement intervals), and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 1 second and transmitted at such intervals. And repeatedly stop calling.

  FIG. 74B shows a wireless signal transmission pattern in the second row of gaming machines on the island 2035 (the row including the gaming machine 1300-5 to gaming machine 1300-5 (see FIG. 65)). In the BLE standard, transmission of an advertisement packet) is repeated 50 times (that is, for 1 second) at 20 ms intervals, and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 2 seconds. Repeat the stop.

  FIG. 74C shows a wireless signal transmission pattern in the first row of gaming machines on the island 2036 (the row including the gaming machines 1300-9 to 1300-12 (see FIG. 65)). In the BLE standard, transmission of an advertisement packet) is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals (that is, for 2 seconds), and then the transmission of the radio signal is stopped for 1 second. Repeat the stop.

  FIG. 74D shows a wireless signal transmission pattern in the second row of gaming machines on the island 2036 (a row including gaming machines 1300-13 to 1300-16 (see FIG. 65)). In the BLE standard, transmission of an advertisement packet) is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals (that is, 2 seconds), and then the transmission of the wireless signal is stopped for 2 seconds. Repeat the stop.

  FIG. 75A is a role information display screen 3061 similar to the role information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A.

  On the role ratio information display screen 3061, the game machine number (display is “machine number”) = “1300-12” is displayed (reference numeral 3063), which corresponds to the information of the game machine 1300-12. A role ratio information display unit 3064 is expanded in a pull-down manner below the gaming machine number, and information including role ratio information of the gaming machines 1300-12 is displayed here. In the role ratio information display section 3004, a gaming machine ID (display is “ID”), the total number of games, an advantageous section ratio, a continuous bonus rate (cumulative), a bonus rate (cumulative), and a continuous bonus rate (6000G) , An accessory ratio (6000G) is displayed.

  Other gaming machines 1300 are displayed below the role information display section 3064 (reference numeral 3065). These gaming machines 1300 are listed from the top in the order of the estimated distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300. Has been.

  Further, by operating a scroll bar 3062 arranged at the right end of the role ratio information display screen 3061, it is possible to display a list of gaming machines 1300 that are farther away from the portable terminal 1700.

  At the bottom of the role ratio information display screen 3061, a display instruction button 3066 that displays “display only gaming machines in the same row” and a display instruction button that displays “display gaming machines on the same island” 3067 is displayed. This point is different from the role ratio information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A as the GUI.

  When the display instruction button 3066 is touched by the user, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 is listed at the top (that is, estimated to be closest to the portable terminal 1700). Control is performed so that only gaming machines in the same row as the machine 1300-12) are displayed.

  Specifically, the wireless signal transmission pattern of the gaming machine 1300-12 (that is, a pattern in which the wireless signal transmission is stopped for 1 second after the wireless signal transmission is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals (see FIG. 73D)). Other game machines with the same pattern as are displayed, and display for other game machines is suppressed.

  Further, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 displays a gaming machine 1300 (here, estimated to be closest to the mobile terminal 1700) that is listed at the top when the display instruction button 3067 is touched by the user (in this example, The game machine 1300-12) is controlled to display only the game machines on the same island.

  Specifically, other gaming machines having the same pattern as the wireless signal transmission pattern of the gaming machine 1300-12 (that is, the pattern in which the wireless signal transmission is repeated 100 times at 20 ms intervals (see FIGS. 73C and 73D)) are displayed. In addition, the display of other gaming machines is suppressed.

  When the display instruction button 3066 is touched on the role ratio information display screen 3061 in FIG. 75A, as shown in the role information display screen 3071 in FIG. 75B, the gaming machines 1300-12 are arranged in the row of the islands. The list is displayed together with other gaming machines 1300 (gaming machine 1300-11, gaming machine 1300-10) (reference numeral 3072). In this example, the gaming machine 1300-9 is arranged in the same column as the gaming machine 1300-12, but is not displayed because the signal strength of the radio signal is far from the portable terminal 1700 and is not sufficient. Yes.

  In the role ratio information display screen 3071 in FIG. 75B, below the list display of the gaming machines 1300 as described above, a display instruction button 3073 indicating “display gaming machines in other columns”, “games on the same island” A display instruction button 3074 displayed as “Display machine” and a display instruction button 75 displayed as “Display all gaming machines” are displayed. The main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 displays these buttons. When touched, the gaming machines 1300 are grouped based on the wireless signal transmission pattern described above, and the gaming machines 1300 determined to be displayed are displayed.

  Further, by repeatedly touching the display instruction button 3073, the groups of the gaming machines 1300 in the other columns can be sequentially displayed.

  Thus, by associating each pattern of radio signal transmission as shown in FIG. 73 according to the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 does not access the information management server 1100. The gaming machines 1300 can be classified and displayed for each island or each row of islands.

  In this example, the wireless signal transmission pattern is changed according to the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300. However, for example, the wireless signal may be changed depending on the model, type, manufacturing timing, manufacturer, and the like of the gaming machine 1300. By changing the transmission pattern, the role ratio information of the gaming machine 1300 can be displayed for each attribute.

  In the above example, the transmission interval of radio signals (for example, the BLE standard advertisement interval) is set to 20 ms. For example, the transmission interval is determined based on the arrangement position of the gaming machine 1300, the model of the gaming machine 1300, and the type. By changing according to attributes such as manufacturing timing and manufacturer, the gaming machines 1300 are classified into several groups, and information regarding gaming machines 1300 belonging to one or more specific groups is selectively displayed on the mobile terminal 1700. can do.

  FIG. 76A shows the configuration of a gaming machine information table 1152 'that is a modification of the gaming machine information table 1152 shown in FIG. 62B. In the gaming machine information table 1152 ′, for each gaming machine 1300, an island number that can identify the island on which the gaming machine 1300 is arranged and a column number that can identify a column in the island are set.

  By preparing such a gaming machine information table 1152 ′, the role information display screen 3061 in FIG. 75A can also be displayed. In this case, there is no need to provide a variation in the radio signal pattern of each gaming machine 1300, but the information management server 1100 is accessed and the island number and column number of the corresponding gaming machine ID are retrieved from the gaming machine information table 1152 ′. Need to get. Further, in this case, the island number and column number of the gaming machine 1300 to be displayed can be designated on the role information display screen 3061.

[Enhancement of role information display control processing]
In the present embodiment, in addition to displaying the role information display screen 3001 and the like on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700 as described above, the role information received by the mobile terminal 1700 from the gaming machine 1300 is stored in the ROM 1702. It can be controlled to store / accumulate, etc. The role ratio information accumulated in this way includes, for example, the gaming machine ID, the total number of games, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (cumulative), the character ratio (cumulative), the continuous character ratio (6000G), and the character ratio ( 6000G), including the reception date and time (update date and time). Further, as the role ratio information, it is also possible to store the game table number and the position information indicating the arrangement position of the gaming machine in the hall store.

  Since the portable terminal 1700 receives these role ratio information from the gaming machine 1300 at predetermined time intervals (for example, at a 20 ms interval (advertisement interval) in a BLE standard beacon signal), the received data is thus received. However, due to the data capacity of the ROM 1702, etc., the role information at a predetermined timing (for example, the first role ratio information whose total number of games has changed) is selected from the received role ratio information. And can be configured to accumulate.

  Furthermore, the portable terminal 1700 displays the above-described role ratio information stored in the ROM 1702 or the like later on the display 1708, for example, when a user (inspector) operates a menu displayed by a predetermined application ( A form can be output to a printer connected via a wireless LAN or the like. Such a display layout or form layout on the display 1708 may be a layout such as a role information display screen 3001 shown in FIG. 66A or a role information display screen 3011 shown in FIG. 66B.

  In addition, when instructing the display of the role ratio information and the output of the form in the menu of the application, the user can use the game table number, the gaming machine ID, the role ratio information such as the total number of games and the advantageous section ratio, the arrangement position in the hall store, Regarding the reception date and time, a range of gaming machines to be displayed (printed) can be set. Further, the user may designate display (printing) in a predetermined order with respect to game machine number, gaming machine ID, role information such as the total number of games and advantageous section ratio, arrangement position in the hall store, reception date and time, and the like. In addition, for example, a game machine satisfying certain conditions, such as a gaming machine whose role ratio information is greater than or equal to a predetermined value, or a game machine whose role ratio information is greater than or equal to a predetermined value at a predetermined time and period The machine can also be specified to be selectively displayed (printed). Also, for the same gaming machine, analyze the time series change of the role ratio information (for example, daily change), display or print according to the change situation, or make the display mode / print mode different from others It may be.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the role ratio information received by the mobile terminal 1700 from the gaming machine 1300 is transmitted to the information management server 1100 via a wireless network using a mobile communication system such as wireless LAN communication or 3G, 4G, Therefore, it is possible to configure so that the role ratio information is stored in the role ratio information storage table 1160. For example, as shown in FIG. 76B, the role ratio information accumulation table 1160 includes a gaming machine ID, the total number of games, an advantageous section ratio, a continuous character ratio (cumulative), a character ratio (cumulative), and a continuous character ratio (6000G). ), Item ratio (6000G), and reception date (update date).

  Here, the mobile terminal 1700 receives the role ratio information according to the timing at which the role ratio information is received from the gaming machine 1300 (for example, at a 20 ms interval (advertisement interval) in the case of a BLE standard beacon signal). The information management server 1100 can store these role ratio information in the role information storage table 1160, but the role ratio information at a predetermined timing (for example, the first time when the total number of games has changed) (Ratio information) can be selected and transmitted to the information management server 1100.

  As described above, the portable terminal 1700 stores the received role ratio information in the memory of the portable terminal 1700 and prints it later, or transmits it to the information management server 1100 and stores it in the role ratio information accumulation table 1160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud (for example, fraud in which the role ratio information is edited or reported falsely) and mistakes by the inspector.

[Association of gaming machine and external concentration terminal board]
When it is intended to identify a gaming machine by associating an ID such as the external concentration terminal board 47 with a gaming machine, this ID can be managed as a gaming machine ID. An ID of a device or the like included in an external concentration terminal board such as a BLE of a BLE module arranged on the terminal board 47 or the like can be used. In this case, when the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier (for example, the gaming machine number) is changed by exchanging the external concentration terminal board, etc., the role ratio information received from the BLE module indicates which gaming machine It becomes impossible to specify whether it is a machine.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the portable terminal 1700 that has received the role ratio information changes the display of the role ratio information in accordance with a change in the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier. For example, the portable terminal 1700 stores the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine as correspondence relationship data, and receives and uses the correspondence relationship data when displaying / printing the role ratio information. The gaming machine number associated with the gaming machine ID is acquired and displayed. When the association between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine number is changed, the application of the mobile terminal 1700 is changed according to the change (for example, by an update process at the time of activation or an instruction from the information management server 1100). Update the above correspondence data and keep it up-to-date. By such a method, the portable terminal 1700 can display / print the gaming machine number or the like based on the latest correspondence even when the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine changes. it can.

  Also, correspondence data storing the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine is stored in a server such as the information management server 1100. When the application of the portable terminal 1700 displays / prints the role information, information is displayed. The management server 1100 can be accessed to grasp the latest correspondence data. Here, the correspondence relationship data has a configuration like, for example, a gaming machine information table 1152 shown in FIG. 62B. In this table, the gaming machine ID (here, indicates the UID of the BLE module, etc.), the gaming machine number, Are managed for each hall store.

  As described above, when the application of the portable terminal 1700 updates the correspondence data according to the change in the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine, the correspondence stored in the information management server 1100 described above. Necessary data can be acquired from the data.

  In addition, such a change in the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine can be performed in factories, hall stores, and information management systems that can grasp the exchange of the external concentration terminal board that caused the correspondence to change. This is performed by an administrator / operator using an information terminal or the like. For example, in a hall store, a hall store manager or the like uses the hall management terminal 1600 to input to change the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine, and the correspondence management data of the information management server 1100 is used. Update. In addition, when a gaming machine is newly placed in a hall store, correspondence data regarding the gaming machine is input by the above-described parties.

  Furthermore, when door opening / closing information indicating that an opening / closing operation has been performed on the door of the gaming machine is received from the portable terminal 1700 via a BLE module or the like arranged on the external concentration terminal board (a sixth embodiment described later). See), a message prompting the administrator to confirm the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the identifier of the gaming machine can be transmitted.

  For example, when a gaming machine detects that a predetermined door of the gaming machine has been opened, the gaming machine ID (here, the UID of the BLE module, etc.) is set via a BLE module arranged on the external concentration terminal board. And door opening / closing information indicating that the door has been opened is transmitted by a BLE signal. When the portable terminal 1700 receives the gaming machine ID and the door opening / closing information transmitted in this way, the portable terminal 1700 transmits this to the information management server 1100. Further, the information management server 1100 updates the gaming machine status management table 1155 based on the received gaming machine ID and door opening / closing information (see the sixth embodiment to be described later), and the correspondence of the correspondence data described above. In the record of the gaming machine ID to be set, the correspondence confirmation flag is set to “1” (in this case, a correspondence relation confirmation flag is newly provided in the correspondence relation data, and the initial value of the correspondence relation confirmation flag is “0”. ").

  Next, the information management server 1100 refers to the correspondence relationship data, and it is necessary to confirm the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine ID whose correspondence relationship confirmation flag is “1” and the corresponding gaming machine number. , To the hall management terminal 1600, and then the corresponding relationship confirmation flag is set to “0”. In this way, in the hall store, the correspondence between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier may have been changed as a result of the exchange of the external concentration terminal board, etc., once for the gaming machine with the door opened. If there is, a message for prompting confirmation of the correspondence is displayed on the hall management terminal 1600.

  In addition, such a message for prompting confirmation of the correspondence can be transmitted when the gaming machine is restored from the power interruption.

  At this time, even when it is detected that a predetermined door of the gaming machine is closed, the door is closed together with the gaming machine ID via the BLE module arranged on the external concentration terminal board. By configuring the door opening / closing information to be transmitted by the BLE signal, the information management server 1100 can also manage the event that the door of the gaming machine is closed. For example, for the same gaming machine ID, When door opening / closing information indicating that the door is opened within a predetermined period of time and door opening / closing information indicating that the door is closed are received, it is determined that the door is not opened / closed for replacement of the external concentrated terminal board. Thus, the gaming machine ID can be controlled not to be transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600.

  The information management server 1100 receives door opening / closing information indicating that the door of the gaming machine has been closed, and the received gaming machine ID is a new ID that is not stored in the correspondence data. In such a case, it can be determined that the external concentration terminal board has been exchanged and the like, and that effect can be transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600.

  At this time, the gaming machine ID receiving only the door opening / closing information indicating that the door has been opened, or the door opening / closing indicating that the most recent (or received within a predetermined period) door has been opened. A gaming machine ID that matches a predetermined condition, such as a gaming machine ID related to information, is determined as a gaming machine ID related to the external centralized terminal board before replacement, and a gaming machine ID related to the corresponding external centralized terminal board after replacement It can be controlled to associate and transmit to the hall management terminal 1600. By indicating the associated gaming machine ID, the hall store manager changes the gaming machine ID from which ID to which ID with respect to a specific gaming machine (due to replacement of the external concentration terminal board, etc.). Can be easily estimated.

  In this example, it is assumed that the gaming machine ID or the like for which the correspondence relationship needs to be confirmed is transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600 arranged in the hall store. However, the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine identifier. Can be transmitted to various computers including the portable terminal 1700 in accordance with an administrator who should manage them.

  In addition, in the correspondence relationship data, it is possible to newly provide a correspondence confirmation confirmed flag and manage the confirmation as a result of the confirmation of the correspondence relationship. For example, in the hall management terminal 1600 or the portable terminal 1700, necessary change input or confirmation is performed on a message for prompting confirmation of correspondence, and when a confirmation completion check is input, the information is transferred to the information management server 1100. The corresponding record of the correspondence data is updated based on the transmission information. For example, “0” is set in the correspondence confirmation flag and “1” is set in the correspondence confirmation flag (the initial value of the correspondence confirmation flag is “0”).

  Here, the information management server 1100 determines that the gaming machine ID whose correspondence relation confirmation flag is “1” and correspondence relation confirmation flag is “0” is unconfirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Then, a message for prompting confirmation of the target gaming machine ID is transmitted to the hall management terminal 1600 and the portable terminal 1700.

  With such a mechanism, the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine are maintained in the correct correspondence relationship, and the role ratio information can be correctly grasped even when the external concentration terminal board is replaced. In addition, the possibility of exchanging the external concentration terminal board, etc. can be detected, and the manager can manage the target for which the correspondence relationship between the gaming machine ID and the gaming machine should be confirmed, and the administrator is prompted to confirm the correspondence relationship. be able to. It can also be configured to manage whether or not the correspondence has been confirmed by the administrator.

  In the sixth embodiment to be described later, the mobile terminal 1700 receives a BLE signal including door opening / closing information transmitted from the gaming machine, transmits the received signal to the information management server 1100, and these processes are performed by the mobile terminal. 1700 owner / operator (for example, a staff member or a player of a hall store) can be performed secretly without being consciously perceived. Here, the user of the mobile terminal 1700 The door opening / closing information and the like can be consciously transmitted to the information management server 1100 via the portable terminal 1700 while witnessing the operation of replacing the external concentration terminal board and returning from the power interruption.

<< Fifth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of an information management system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a gaming machine distribution management process for managing the distribution of each gaming machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<System overview>
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300a, and the gaming machine ID included in the wireless signal is acquired by the portable terminal 1700 that receives the wireless signal. The gaming machine 1300a has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the gaming machine 1300a may be configured not to include role ratio information or the like in the radio signal. Moreover, you may make it transmit a radio signal by another radio signal transmission circuit (for example, BLE module different from the BLE module 49 mentioned above).

  Receiving the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300a, the portable terminal 1700 transmits the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 together with the hall ID (identifier that can identify the hall store) grasped by the portable terminal 1700 and the date / time information. When the information management server 1100 receives a gaming machine ID or the like from the portable terminal 1700, the information management server 1100 refers to the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 to determine whether or not a record relating to the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID exists. If it does not exist, a record is added with the date / time information as the first reception date / time, and if it exists, the latest reception date / time of the record is updated.

  In the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, the BLE module 306 (see FIG. 78)) incorporated in the data display device 300a connected to the gaming machine 1300a to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it transmit gaming machine ID. Further, a radio signal is transmitted from a sand signal device 1370 or a radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300a to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it transmit gaming machine ID.

  Through such a gaming machine distribution management process, it is possible to manage from which time to when the gaming machine 1300a has been placed. In this case, the date and time when the gaming machine 1300 is placed in the hall store and the date and time when the gaming machine 1300 is moved from the hall are only “outline”, but the portable terminal 1700 frequently receives the radio signal, so that the gaming machine The timing of the movement of 1300a can be grasped in more detail. The reception of the gaming machine ID by the portable terminal 1700 can be realized by, for example, a game machine manufacturer in charge of visiting a hall store for sales or headquarters. In addition, a staff of a third-party organization related to distribution management of gaming machines may perform such a patrol.

  Further, the gaming machine distribution management process makes it easy to track the gaming machine 1300 and makes it possible to plan an effective manufacturing / distribution strategy. As a result, since the usage period and usage environment of the gaming machine 1300 can be grasped, effective quality management can be performed. Such tracking and quality control can be performed for each part by associating the gaming machine 1300a with the part.

  Since the portable terminal 1700 receives a radio signal from each gaming machine 1300a and thereby obtains the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300a, the user simply passes in front of the gaming machine 1300a so that many gaming machines 1300a The gaming machine ID can be collected.

  Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300a as a whole. For example, the “chip individual number” of the main CPU 101, the ID stored in advance in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit, etc. Can be assigned.

  Further, the IDs of the external concentration terminal board 647, the ROM 649b of the BLE module 649, the BLE chip 649d, etc. may be set in association with the gaming machine (see FIG. 78). Such an association between the ID and the gaming machine 1300a can be performed in a hall store or a factory. Further, these IDs need to be linked again when the external concentration terminal board 47 is replaced.

  In addition, as a user of the portable terminal 1700 assumed in the gaming machine distribution management process of the present embodiment, for example, a manager or a staff of a hall store, a manufacturer of the gaming machine 1300a, and a third managing the distribution of the gaming machine 1300a. A person's organization is considered.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 78, the main control circuit 690 of the gaming machine 1300a includes a microprocessor 691 (main CPU 601) and a role monitor 695, where the role monitor 695 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 691 transmits role ratio information (output data for a 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the role-ratio monitor 695, the role-ratio monitor 695 turns on the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. The role ratio information is displayed.

  A relay circuit 648 and a BLE module 649 are mounted on the board of the external concentration terminal board 647, and the microprocessor 691 receives a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and If one medal is paid out, one signal is sent to the CPU 301 of the external data display device 300a connected to the external concentration terminal board 647 via the relay circuit 648. The game information is displayed by the CPU 301 based on the received signal.

  The microprocessor 691 further transmits the gaming machine ID to the BLE module 306 of the data display device 300a connected via the external concentration terminal board 647. Although not shown here, the BLE module 306 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a BLE chip. The CPU of the BLE module 306 controls the BLE chip when receiving data (gaming machine ID) from the microprocessor 691 based on a program stored in the ROM, and controls the gaming machine ID, hall ID, and date / time information. Is transmitted as a BLE standard beacon signal from the antenna of the BLE chip. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip can be received by a portable terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

  The data display device 300a and the data display device 300b described later can be updated so that data such as the gaming machine ID is transmitted via the sand device 1370 or the hall computer 1200.

  The microprocessor 691 also transmits a gaming machine ID and role ratio information to the BLE module 649. The BLE module 649 includes a CPU 649a, a ROM 649b, a RAM 649c, and a BLE chip 649d. Based on the program stored in the ROM 649b, the CPU 649a controls the BLE chip 649d and receives the game machine ID and role ratio information when data (game machine ID and role ratio information) is received from the microprocessor 691. Is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 649d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 649d can be received by a portable terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

  In the example of FIG. 78, the role ratio monitor 695 and the BLE module 649 are provided and role ratio information is displayed and transmitted by these, but these configurations can be omitted. 77 and 78, the BLE module 649 of the external concentration terminal board 647 may be used to transmit the gaming machine ID to the portable terminal 1700.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the gaming machine distribution management process of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 79 shows an example of the gaming machine distribution management table 1154. The gaming machine distribution management table 1154 includes a gaming machine ID, a hall ID, an initial reception date and time, and a latest reception date and time. By the above-mentioned game machine distribution management process, it is grasped how long the game machine has been used over a plurality of hall stores. For example, in the example of FIG. 79, a gaming machine with a gaming machine ID = “4890998216” is about 3 years and 3 months at a hall store with a hall ID = “H001”, and about 1 year 9 at a hall shop with a hall ID = “H038”. It can be seen that it has been used for months (see reference B1).

<Description of game machine distribution management processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the gaming machine distribution management process in the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine distribution management process executed by the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Also, in FIG. 80, the processing flow of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  The gaming machine distribution management process can be executed by, for example, downloading a designated application from the predetermined server to the portable terminal 1700. Here, it is assumed that the application is activated during the gaming machine distribution management process. In addition, when a radio signal described later is received, the application can be activated or a message prompting activation can be displayed.

  First, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines whether or not a hall ID has been received from the user (S3061). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S3061 is NO), the reception processing is repeated. The hall ID identifies the hall store that performs the gaming machine distribution management process. For example, when the user selects one of the hall store names listed on the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700, the portable terminal 1700 is selected. Provided to.

  In place of the hall ID, coordinate data obtained by GPS in the mobile terminal 1700 located near the hall store, coordinate data obtained when the hall store is specified by a map application, or the like can be used. In this case, the coordinate data and the like are also stored in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 described above.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the hall ID has been received (S3061 is YES), the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received (S3062). . When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal is not received (when S3062 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S3062 is YES), it decodes the received wireless signal to obtain a UUID (S3063). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S3064). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S3064 is NO), the process returns to S3062 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (YES in S3064), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S3065). Next, whether or not the main CPU 1701 has transmitted the data of the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of one day, one hour, after the application is started until now). It is determined (S3066). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID has been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when S3066 is YES), the process returns to S3062 to receive a radio signal. This determination is for preventing data of the same gaming machine ID from being transmitted to the information management server 1100 more frequently than necessary.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID is not transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when S3066 is NO), the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal and the hole held in the portable terminal 1700 The ID and date / time information are transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S3067). Here, the date information can be set by the information management server 1100 without transmitting the date information.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives a gaming machine ID, a hall ID, etc. from the portable terminal 1700, the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 is referred to, and the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID is a gaming machine distribution management table 1154. Is already present (S069).

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID already exists in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 (when S3070 is YES), the main CPU 1101 determines that the gaming machine 1300a indicated by the gaming machine ID is Since it is known that the hall ID is located in the hall store, the latest reception date / time is updated with the date / time information for the record in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154, and this item is set as the latest date / time (S3072). ).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 1101 determines that the combination of the gaming machine ID and the hall ID does not already exist in the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 (when S3070 is NO), the main CPU 1101 displays the gaming machine ID indicated by the gaming machine ID. Since it is not yet known that the machine 1300a is located in the hall store with the hall ID, a record including the gaming machine ID and the hall ID is added to the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 (S3071). Then, the date information is set to the first reception date.

  After the process of S3071 or the process of S3072, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

  The main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines whether or not there is an end instruction from the user after the processing of S3067 (S3068). When it is determined that there is an end instruction from the user (when S3068 is YES), the gaming machine distribution management process is ended. When it is determined that there is no end instruction from the user (when S3068 is NO), the process returns to S3062 to receive a radio signal.

  As a result of such a game machine distribution management process being performed at each hall store by the user, a large amount of distribution data is accumulated in the game machine distribution management table 1154 as shown in FIG. The information management server 1100 analyzes the distribution data of the gaming machine distribution management table 1154 at a predetermined timing, thereby using useful data on the usage mode (how to use, frequency of movement, etc.) and quality of the gaming machine 1300a. Can be obtained. Further, by linking the gaming machine ID with the gaming machine type, manufacturer, date of manufacture, etc., it is possible to grasp the usage mode, quality, etc. for each of these attributes.

  In this embodiment, for example, a gaming machine icon as shown in FIG. 70 is displayed on the portable terminal 1700, and a gaming machine icon of a gaming machine that has obtained a gaming machine ID and a gaming machine that has not obtained a gaming machine ID. You may make it display the game machine icon of a machine distinguishing. Here, it is also possible to display only the gaming machine icon of the gaming machine that has acquired the gaming machine ID. In addition, as shown in FIG. 71, the arrangement position of the gaming machine is displayed using a map information table 1153, and the gaming machine that has acquired the gaming machine ID is distinguished from the gaming machine that has not acquired the gaming machine ID. You may make it display separately.

<< Sixth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of an information management system according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a gaming machine status transmission process for transmitting door opening / closing information and operating time information of each gaming machine 1300 arranged in the hall store, and a gaming machine status check process are realized.

<System overview>
FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300b, and the gaming machine ID included in the wireless signal receives the wireless signal together with door opening / closing information and operating time information. Obtained by the portable terminal 1700. The gaming machine 1300b has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here, the gaming machine 1300b can also be configured such that the wireless signal does not include role ratio information or the like. Moreover, you may make it transmit a radio signal by another radio signal transmission circuit (for example, BLE module different from the BLE module 49 mentioned above).

  The portable terminal 1700 that has received the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300b transmits the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information to the information management server 1100 together with the date / time information grasped by the portable terminal 1700. When the information management server 1100 receives a gaming machine ID or the like from the portable terminal 1700, the information management server 1100 stores the gaming machine ID in the gaming machine status management table 1155. Thereafter, the information management server 1100 refers to the gaming machine status management table 1155 at a predetermined timing, and when a door opening / closing frequency or operation time satisfies a predetermined condition, a message (for example, a hall computer 1200) is sent to the computer. A message for notifying that the number of abnormal opening / closing operations and the operation time has exceeded a predetermined level).

  In the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300b connected to the gaming machine 1300b, and a gaming machine ID or the like is transmitted to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it do. In addition, a radio signal is transmitted from a sand signal device 1370 or a radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300b to the portable terminal 1700. A gaming machine ID or the like may be transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the mobile terminal 1700 transmits information such as the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100, the transmission is performed by the owner / operator of the mobile terminal 1700 (for example, staff of a hall store or game Can be performed in a secret without being consciously perceived by a person).

  By such a gaming machine status transmission process, door opening / closing information and operating time information of the gaming machine 1300b are collected by a secret process of the portable terminal 1700. Such collection of door opening / closing information leads to management of security information, and useful data is accumulated before an abnormality occurs. In addition, since it is possible to collect door opening / closing information without passing through the equipment in the hall store, it is possible to monitor and manage by a third party, and send a message to an appropriate organization in the event of an abnormality, etc. can do.

  On the other hand, collection of operating time information leads to management of quality / maintenance information of the gaming machine 1300b. By accumulating operating time information, it is possible to notify the possibility of failure due to aging or the like, and the necessity of maintenance.

  Further, by such a gaming machine status transmission process, the door opening / closing information and operating time information of many gaming machines 1300b are collected unconsciously by the user simply by passing in front of the gaming machine 1300b. The

  Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300b as a whole, as in the fifth embodiment. For example, it is possible to assign an ID stored in advance in the “chip individual number” of the main CPU 101 or the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit.

  In addition, as a user of the portable terminal 1700 assumed in the gaming machine status transmission process of the present embodiment, for example, a player, a manager or staff of a hall store, a manufacturer of the gaming machine 1300b, and a status management of the gaming machine 1300b are performed. Possible third-party organizations to perform.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
In FIG. 82, the main control circuit 790 of the gaming machine 1300b includes a microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) and a role monitor 795, where the role monitor 795 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED circuit. When the microprocessor 791 transmits role ratio information (output data for a 4-digit 7-segment LED) to the role-ratio monitor 795, the role-ratio monitor 795 turns on the 4-digit 7-segment LED accordingly. The role ratio information is displayed.

  A relay circuit 748 and a BLE module 749 are mounted on the board of the external concentration terminal board 747, and the microprocessor 791 receives a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal (one medal insertion and If one medal is paid out, one signal is sent to the CPU 311 of the external data display device 300b connected to the external concentration terminal board 747 via the relay circuit 748. The game information is displayed by the CPU 311 based on the received signal.

  The microprocessor 791 also transmits a gaming machine ID and role ratio information to the BLE module 749. The BLE module 749 includes a CPU 749a, a ROM 749b, a RAM 749c, and a BLE chip 749d. The CPU 749a controls the BLE chip 749d when receiving data (game machine ID and role ratio information) from the microprocessor 791 based on a program stored in the ROM 749b, and controls the game machine ID and role ratio information. Is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 749d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 749d can be received by a portable terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

  The main CPU 101 of the microprocessor 791 transmits a gaming machine ID and operating time information to the sub-control circuit 200 'at a predetermined timing. Here, the operating time information is, for example, data stored in the main RAM 103, including the operating time of the gaming machine 1300b measured by the timer circuit 113. Moreover, the time when the gaming machine 1300b is continuously operated can be measured and included in the operating time information.

  When the sub CPU 201 ′ of the sub control circuit 200 ′ receives the gaming machine ID and the operation time information from the main CPU 101, it adds door opening / closing information to the BLE module 749. Here, the sub CPU 201 ′ uses, for example, a signal detected by the door opening / closing monitoring switch 67 for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2 or a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 that detects when the middle door 41 is opened. Based on the transmitted signal, the number of times of opening and closing the door, the date and time, etc. are stored in the sub RAM 202 ′ as door opening and closing information.

  When the CPU 749a of the BLE module 749 receives the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information from the sub-control circuit 200 ′, the CPU 749a controls the BLE chip 749d based on the program stored in the ROM 749b, and receives the received game. The machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operation time information are wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip 749d as a BLE standard beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip 749d can be received by a portable terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

  The sub CPU 201 ′ of the sub control circuit 200 ′ further transmits the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information to the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300 b connected via the external concentration terminal board 747. Although not shown here, the BLE module 307 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a BLE chip. When the CPU receives a gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information from the sub CPU 201 ′ based on a program stored in the ROM, the CPU controls the BLE chip to control the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, The operating time information is wirelessly transmitted from the antenna of the BLE chip as a beacon signal. The beacon signal transmitted by the BLE chip can be received by a portable terminal 1700 such as a smartphone or a tablet terminal via a wireless communication network.

  In the example of FIG. 82, the role ratio monitor 795 and the BLE module 749 are provided, and the role ratio information is displayed and transmitted by these, but these configurations can be omitted. Also, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information can be transmitted to the portable terminal 1700 by the BLE module 749 of the external concentration terminal board 747.

  In this example, the data such as the gaming machine ID, the door opening / closing information, and the operation time information are merely illustrated as the route through which the data is transmitted to the BLE module 749 and the BLE module 307, and other various routes and methods. Thus, it is possible to transmit the information. For example, for the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300b, data such as a gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information is provided from the gaming machine 1300b via the sand device 1370, the hall computer 1200, and the like. Also good.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the gaming machine status transmission process of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 shows an example of the gaming machine status management table 1155. The gaming machine status management table 1155 includes a gaming machine ID, the number of door opening / closing times, an operating time, and an update date / time.

<Description of gaming machine status transmission processing and gaming machine status check processing in the information management system>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the gaming machine status transmission process in the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a procedure of gaming machine status transmission processing executed by the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Also, in FIG. 84, the processing flow of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  The gaming machine status transmission process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application for performing a predetermined service from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. The user uses this application in another service, and the user has no awareness that this application functions for a gaming machine status transmission process described later.

  First, the mobile terminal 1700 is activated by a user operation. Next, the main CPU 1701 of the mobile terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received (S3091). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S3091 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S3091 is YES), the game machine status transmission processing application is activated (in the background) (S3092). At this time, the gaming machine status transmission process may be executed (secretly) by an application that has already been activated.

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S3093). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S3094). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not the processing target (when S3094 is NO), the process returns to S3091 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (YES in S3094), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S3095).

  Next, whether or not the main CPU 1701 has transmitted the data of the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100 within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of one day, one hour, after the application is started until now). It is determined (S3096). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID has been transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when S3096 is YES), the process returns to S3091, and a radio signal is received. This determination is for preventing data of the same gaming machine ID from being transmitted to the information management server 1100 more frequently than necessary. At this time, even when a session such as a wireless LAN is not established in the portable terminal 1700, the gaming machine ID can be prevented from being transmitted. This is because, for example, the burden for data transmission in the user's portable terminal 1700 is minimized, and the user is not aware of the data transmission.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the data of the gaming machine ID is not transmitted to the information management server 1100 (when S3096 is NO), the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operation time information acquired from the received signal are displayed. The information is transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S3097). Here, the date information can be set by the information management server 1100 without transmitting the date information.

  In the present embodiment, in the portable terminal 1700, when the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal, the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information can be obtained by clearing the timing condition in S3096. Is transmitted to the information management server 1100, but it is further determined that the signal strength of the received radio signal is equal to or higher than a certain level (for example, a player plays a game with the gaming machine 1300b). When it is determined that the user is seated for that purpose (that is, when it is determined that the game machine 1300b has played a game), the gaming machine ID or the like is transmitted to the information management server 1100. Can do.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives a gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and the like from the portable terminal 1700, the corresponding gaming machine ID record in the gaming machine status management table 1155 is updated (S3099). If there is no corresponding gaming machine ID, it is added as a new record. The date / time information is stored as an update date / time. After the processing of S3099, the main CPU 1101 ends the processing.

  The main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal (for example, a beacon signal based on the BLE standard) has been received after the processing of S3097 (S3098). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S3098 is NO), the reception processing is repeated. When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal has been received (when S3098 is YES), the process proceeds to S3093, where the newly received radio signal is processed.

  In the gaming machine status transmission process shown in FIG. 84, no information is output (changed) to the perceptual providing means such as a display, a speaker, and a vibration motor regarding the reception / transmission of data such as the gaming machine ID in the portable terminal 1700. Can be. In this example, data such as a gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operating time information is transmitted to the information management server 1100, but various other data relating to gaming machines can be transmitted. In 1100, big data storing these data can be formed.

  Next, a gaming machine status check process in the information management server 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine status check process executed by the information management server 1100.

  First, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 determines whether or not a predetermined timing for checking the gaming machine situation has arrived (S4011). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the predetermined timing has not arrived (when S4011 is NO), the process returns to S4011, and the determination process is repeated.

  Next, when the main CPU 1101 determines that the predetermined timing has arrived (when S4011 is YES), the main CPU 1101 scans each record of the gaming machine status management table 1155 (S4012). Next, the main CPU 1101 determines whether or not processing has been completed for all cases in the gaming machine status management table 1155 (S4013). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the process has been completed for all cases in the gaming machine status management table 1155 (when S4013 is YES), the process returns to the process of S4011 to repeat the determination process and wait until the next execution timing. .

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the processing has not been completed for all cases in the gaming machine status management table 1155 (when S4013 is NO), the door of the gaming machine ID of the record scanned in the gaming machine status management table 1155 It is determined whether or not the number of times of opening and closing is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S4014). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the door opening / closing frequency is equal to or greater than a predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when S4014 is YES), the main CPU 1101 responds to a predetermined server according to the door opening / closing frequency. A message is transmitted (S4015).

  For example, when the door opening / closing frequency exceeds the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the first threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the first threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be further changed according to the gaming machine ID, the update date and time, the hall ID associated with the gaming machine ID, the manufacturer ID, and the like.

  When the door opening / closing frequency exceeds a second threshold value that is greater than the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the second threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the second threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be changed variously as in the first threshold value.

  By such processing, a message having an appropriate content can be transmitted to a server of an appropriate corresponding organization according to the number of times the door is opened and closed (that is, according to a security risk or the like).

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the door opening / closing frequency is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when S4014 is NO), or after the processing of S4015, the gaming machine status management table 1155 is scanned. For the gaming machine ID of the record, it is determined whether or not the operating time is a predetermined value or more (S4016). When the main CPU 1101 determines that the operating time is greater than or equal to a predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when S4016 is YES), a message corresponding to a predetermined server is sent according to the operating time. Transmit (S4017).

  For example, when the operating time exceeds the first threshold, a message corresponding to the first threshold is transmitted to the server corresponding to the first threshold. Here, the server and the message can be further changed according to the gaming machine ID, the update date and time, the hall ID associated with the gaming machine ID, the manufacturer ID, and the like.

  If the operating time exceeds a second threshold value that is greater than the first threshold value, a message corresponding to the second threshold value is transmitted to the server corresponding to the second threshold value. Here, the server and the message can be changed variously as in the first threshold value.

  By such processing, a message having an appropriate content is transmitted to a server of an appropriate institution corresponding to an operating time of the gaming machine 1300b (that is, according to a quality problem, a necessity for maintenance, or the like). be able to.

  In addition, the operating time here is assumed to be the cumulative operating time in the gaming machine 1300b, but various operating times such as continuous operating time in a day and operating time for games are captured. Can be evaluated.

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the operating time is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value for the scanned gaming machine ID (when S4016 is NO), or after the process of S4017, the process returns to S4012, and other records Process.

  In this embodiment, the portable terminal 1700 receives the gaming machine ID, door opening / closing information, and operation time information from the gaming machine 1300b and the data display device 300b, and the user is basically aware of the information management server 1100. However, it can be configured to receive various other data by radio signals and transmit them to the information management server 1100 in a secret manner.

<< Seventh Embodiment >>
Next, background technology and problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a game information management process for transmitting and managing game information and the like of each gaming machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
Several game systems have been proposed in which a player records the number of medals inserted during a game or the number of medals paid out as a game history using an information recording medium or a mobile phone.

For example, in the game system of the following patent document, game information recorded by a gaming machine is transmitted to a server via a mobile phone, and the server stores the received game information in association with the player. When starting the recording of gaming information in the gaming machine and transmitting the gaming information recorded in the gaming machine to the server, the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine with a mobile phone, Identify the person.
Patent literature: JP 2012-50614

  However, in the gaming system of the above-mentioned patent document, when starting recording of gaming information in the gaming machine and transmitting gaming information recorded in the gaming machine to the server, the mobile phone is bothered toward the display device of the gaming machine. It is necessary to photograph a two-dimensional code, and the operation is complicated.

<Effect>
With the information management system and the like of this embodiment, the player's own game information can be stored and displayed by an easy operation on a portable terminal, and the player's interest can be improved.

<System overview>
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, when a user (player) starts a game, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300c, and domain information, gaming machine ID, The total number of games of the gaming machine 1300c is acquired by the player's portable terminal 1700. Thereafter, the portable terminal 1700 accesses the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information, and the storage area of the game information related to the user is stored. Secured.

  Next, when the user (player) finishes the game or tries to store the game information in the middle of the game, a radio signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300c, and the domain information and the game included in the radio signal are transmitted. The machine ID, the total number of games of the gaming machine 1300c, and the game information of the user are acquired by the player's mobile terminal 1700, and then the mobile terminal 1700 accesses the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information. The game information relating to the user is stored in the storage area stored at the start. The stored gaming information can be displayed by the portable terminal 1700 by referring to the storage area of the information management server 1100. For example, the gaming information can be managed across different gaming machines 1300c on different days. it can.

  Note that the gaming machine 1300c has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here is configured such that the wireless signal does not include role information or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300c connected to the gaming machine 1300c, and the gaming machine ID and gaming information are transmitted to the portable terminal 1700. Etc. may be transmitted. In addition, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in a sand device 1370 or another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300c, to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it transmit game machine ID, game information, etc.

  By such game information management communication processing, the player can easily display the game result or the like in the gaming machine 1300c using his / her own mobile terminal 1700, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

  In addition, since game information related to the player is transmitted by radio signal, there is a risk that other players may refer to or misuse the information without permission, but the game information is transmitted to the information management server 1100. In this case, the player ID is identified and the application ID associated with the application of the portable terminal 1700 is transmitted, so that the game information is effectively prevented from being used by others.

  In the present embodiment, the user (player) of the mobile terminal 1700 is specified based on the application ID as described above. In addition to such an application ID, the device ID, the MAC address, the telephone of the mobile terminal 1700 An identifier that can uniquely identify the user or the mobile terminal 1700 such as a number or an SNS ID can also be used (the same applies to the application ID used in the following embodiments).

  Here, the gaming machine ID is an identifier that can individually identify the gaming machine 1300c as a whole, as in the fifth embodiment. For example, it is possible to assign an ID stored in advance in the “chip individual number” of the main CPU 101 or the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit.

  Note that the user of the portable terminal 1700 assumed in the game information management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
A gaming machine 1300c of this embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG.

  Note that the total number of games transmitted by the radio signal can be grasped based on the “total number of games” shown in FIG. The “total number of games” is stored in a prescribed external work area in the main RAM 103, and the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790 (via the sub-control circuit 200 ′) Provided to the BLE module 307.

  The player's game information includes the number of games since the start of the game, the number of inserted games, the number of paid-out games, the number of SB implementations, the number of CB implementations, the number of RB implementations, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 ′ is stored in the sub-RAM 202 ′ for each player, and finally provided to the BLE module 749 and the BLE module 307.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the game information management process of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 87 shows an example of the game information management table 1156. The game information management table 1156 includes an application ID, the total number of games, a game machine ID, a model code, a type number, game information, and an update date. The game information includes the number of games, the number of inserted games, the number of paid-out games, the number of SB implementations, the number of CB implementations, the number of RB implementations, and the like.

  With such a configuration of the game information management table 1156, contents played by various gaming machines 1300c are accumulated for the player specified by the application ID.

<Description of Game Information Management Process in Information Management System>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, game information management processing in the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be described. 88 and 89 are flowcharts showing a procedure of game information management processing executed by the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. 88 and 89, the processing flow of the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  This game information management process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, in the game information management process, as will be described later, it is assumed that the application is activated with the reception of a radio signal as a trigger. Note that an application can be activated in advance, or a message prompting activation can be displayed when a wireless signal is received.

  First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300c), for example, displays a menu on the sub display device 18, and instructs “start game recording” there. Thereby, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300c starts to record the game content (S4031). For example, the sub CPU 201 ′ has transmitted the number of games, the number of inserted games, the number of paid out games, the number of SB implementations, the number of CB implementations, the number of RB implementations, etc. from the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790. Based on the data, it is stored in the sub-RAM 202 ′.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300c transmits a radio signal including the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games as a BLE-standard beacon signal (S4032). Here, the total number of games is the total number of games at the time when the instruction “start game recording” is given.

  Here, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not a radio signal is received from the gaming machine 1300c (S4033). When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal is not received (when S4033 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal has been received (YES in S4033), the game information management processing application is activated (eg, in the background) (S4034).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S4035). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4036). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4036 is NO), the process returns to S4033 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (S4036: YES), the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games are acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S4037).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal and the total number of games together with the application ID to the information management server 1100 (S4038). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information indicating the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. The application ID is an ID stored in the game information management processing application described above, and a different ID is set for each user. In this process, the signal strength (for example, RSSI) of the received signal is evaluated, and the received signal strength is higher than a predetermined value assumed when the player holds the portable terminal 1700 at the seating position. It is determined that the signal is a signal from the gaming machine 1300c of the player, and data is transmitted to the information management server 1100.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the application ID, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games from the portable terminal 1700, a record including these data is added to the gaming information management table 1156 (S4039). The update date / time is set by date / time information managed by the information management server 1100. Next, the mobile terminal 1700 is notified of the completion of the update of the game information management table 1156 (S4040). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives a notification of the completion of the update of the game information management table 1156 from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 displays a completion message of the game record start process on the display 1708 (S4041).

  At this point, the gaming machine 1300c still continues to transmit radio signals (S4032).

  Here, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines again whether or not a wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300c has been received (S4061). When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal is not received (S4061 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S4061 is YES), the main CPU 1701 decodes the received wireless signal to obtain a UUID (S4062). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4063). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4063 is NO), the process returns to S4061 to receive a radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (when S4063 is YES), it acquires a gaming machine ID from the decrypted radio signal (S4064).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal is the same as the gaming machine ID used in the game recording start process (S4065). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine ID is different (when S4065 is NO), the process returns to S4061 to receive a radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are the same (when S4065 is YES), the signal strength of the received radio signal (for example, RSSI of the beacon signal) is acquired and transmitted to the information management server 1100. (S4067).

  Next, when the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the signal strength from the mobile terminal 1700, it determines whether the user is away from the seat, that is, the signal strength received from the mobile terminal 1700 is equal to or less than a predetermined value (ie, Then, it is determined whether or not the portable terminal 1700 is separated from the gaming machine 1300c by a certain distance (S4068).

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the person is not away (when S4068 is NO), the main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the user is away (when S4068 is YES), the main CPU 1101 transmits a notification that the user is away from the seat to the portable terminal 1700 (S4069). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives a notification that the user is away from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 displays a message indicating that the user is away from the seat on the display 1708 (S4070). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

  In the gaming machine 1300c, the sub CPU 201 'determines whether or not an end operation has been performed (S4071). When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is no end operation (when S4071 is NO), the process returns to S4071 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is an end operation (YES in S4071), the menu display is ended and the process is ended.

  A storage area for storing game information of a player in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100 using the portable terminal 1700 of the player in accordance with the instruction of “game recording start” by the player is provided. Secured.

  Such a storage area is managed for each gaming machine ID, but at the same time, a player who has given an instruction to “start gaming recording” later so that gaming information cannot be stored for the same gaming machine ID. Requests are controlled to be rejected. Further, when a predetermined time has passed without an instruction of “acquisition of halfway progress” or “end of game recording” after determination of leaving, the storage area corresponding to this is deleted.

  Here, it is determined whether or not the person is away from the information in the information management server 1100, but the mobile terminal 1700 may determine this and transmit the determination result to the information management server 1100. Whether or not the player is seated (not leaving), for example, the signal strength of the radio signal received from the gaming machine 1300c is a predetermined level (for example, a level closer to the proximity, “almost contact”). If it is, the user can be determined to be seated. Moreover, you may determine seating using such a signal strength and the image picked-up by a camera, or an image determination result. In this example, the camera is provided with a sand device 1370 connected to the gaming machine 1300c (camera 1335). The image determination result or the like may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1300c (for example, by a wireless signal from the BLE module) to the portable terminal 1700.

  Furthermore, regarding the signal strength of the received radio signal, it is determined that the user is seated when the above-mentioned “substantially contact” level continues for a predetermined time or more, and the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300c is associated with the application ID at that time. The information may be stored in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a record from being easily stored in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100 by an application of a passing player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 90, game information management processing in the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be further described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game information management processing executed by the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. In FIG. 90, the processing flow of the gaming machine 1300c, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  This game information management process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, in the game information management process, as will be described later, it is assumed that the application is activated with the reception of a radio signal as a trigger. Note that an application can be activated in advance, or a message prompting activation can be displayed when a wireless signal is received.

  First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300c), for example, displays a menu on the sub display device 18, and gives an instruction to “end game recording”. Thereby, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300c tries to store the game content in the information management server 1100 (S4091). For example, the sub CPU 201 ′ displays the number of games, the number of inserted games, the number of paid-out games, the number of SB implementations, the number of CB implementations, the number of RB implementations, etc. from the time when the instruction to “start game recording” is given. Based on the data transmitted from 791 (main CPU 701), the data is stored in the sub-RAM 202 ', and the storage result is transmitted to the portable terminal 1700.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 ′ of the gaming machine 1300c transmits a radio signal including the gaming information including the domain information, the gaming machine ID, the total number of games, and the number of games and the number of games inserted as, for example, a BLE standard beacon signal ( S4092). Here, the total number of games is the total number of games at the time when the instruction “start game recording” is given.

  Here, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not a radio signal is received from the gaming machine 1300c (S4093). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S4093 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal has been received (YES in S4093), the game information management processing application is activated (eg, in the background) (S4094).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S4095). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4096). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4096 is NO), the process returns to S4093 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (S4096 is YES), domain information, gaming machine ID, total number of games, and gaming information are acquired from the decoded radio signal (S4097). .

  Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the gaming machine ID, the total number of games, and the game information acquired from the received signal to the information management server 1100 together with the application ID (S4098). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information indicating the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. The application ID is an ID stored in the game information management processing application described above, and a different ID is set for each user.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives an application ID, a gaming machine ID, the total number of games, and gaming information from the mobile terminal 1700, the gaming information management table 1156 has a record with the matching application ID and gaming machine ID. It is determined whether or not to perform (S4099). When the main CPU 1101 determines that there is no record in which the application ID matches the gaming machine ID (NO in S4099), the main CPU 1101 controls to notify the mobile terminal 1700 of a processing error (S4100), and receives this notification. The main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 displays, on the display 1708, an error message indicating that the game recording end instruction has been given in a state where the game recording start instruction has not been given (S4101).

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 determines that there is a record in which the application ID and the gaming machine ID match (when S4099 is YES), a record including the received game information is displayed in the game information management table 1156. (S4102). The update date / time is set by date / time information managed by the information management server 1100. Thus, by adding a new record without updating an item of an existing record, the player can check his / her game history.

  Next, the main CPU 1101 acquires a record in which the same application ID is stored from the game information management table 1156, edits the game information display data, and transmits it to the portable terminal 1700 (S4103). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process. In this example, when an instruction to “end game recording” is given, the game information of the player is displayed together with the recording of the game information. However, the display of the game information is separately displayed on the portable terminal 1700. It can also be requested and displayed.

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives the game information display data from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 displays a completion message of the game record end process (S4104), and then, based on the game information display data, the portable terminal 1700. The game information display screen is displayed on the display 1708 (S4105). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

  In the gaming machine 1300c, the sub CPU 201 'determines whether or not an end operation has been performed (S4106). When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is no end operation (NO in S4106), the process returns to S4106 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is an end operation (YES in S4106), the menu display is ended and the process is ended.

  Here, the processing according to the instruction “end game recording” has been described, but the case where the instruction “acquisition of progress” is instructed will be omitted. Similarly, when a “middle progress acquisition” instruction is issued, a new record of game information is stored in the game information management table 1156 of the information management server 1100. Therefore, the game information at this point can be displayed later.

<< Eighth Embodiment >>
Next, background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of an information management system according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, the privilege management process which transmits and manages the game machine ID etc. of each game machine 1300 arrange | positioned in a hall store is implement | achieved.

<Background technology and issues>
A conventional gaming machine that allows a player to perform a predetermined operation of a gaming machine when the gaming state of the player satisfies a predetermined condition, and grants some privilege when the operation satisfies a certain condition There is.

In the following patent document, when the player is in a general gaming state, the difference counter is 2000 or more and the navigation point counter is 10 or less, a predictor can be selected. A navigation point is added if it matches. When the difference number counter is 2000 or more and the navigation point counter is greater than 10, an internal winning combination is notified as a privilege to the player. By giving such a privilege, the game can be prevented from being monotonous.
Patent Document: JP 2010-5086 A

  However, the privilege in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned patent document is provided as a function of the gaming machine, and is not provided by all gaming machines. Therefore, the possibility of obtaining such a privilege is already known at the time when the player selects a gaming machine, and is not given according to the gaming machine to be played.

<Effect>
With the information management system and the like of this embodiment, it is possible to attract customers and create a topic (provided that it does not fall under the act of instigating gambling) with provision of benefits by entities other than the hall store or gaming machine manufacturer. In addition, since it is determined whether or not a player can obtain a privilege by selecting a gaming machine, not a game, further enhancement of interest can be achieved.

  Furthermore, in the hall store, the number of gaming machines and gaming machines to which a privilege based on the value provided from a manufacturer other than the hall shop or gaming machine manufacturer can be determined can be determined.

<System overview>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300d, and the domain information, gaming machine ID, and total number of games of the gaming machine 1300d included in the wireless signal are determined by the player. It is acquired in the portable terminal 1700, and thereafter, the portable terminal 1700 accesses the information management server 1100 specified by the domain information, and the privilege management table 1157 indicates that the user has played a game on the corresponding gaming machine 1300d. Remembered. Thereafter, the information management server 1100 determines a gaming machine 1300d to which a privilege is to be granted, identifies a player who has played a game with the gaming machine 1300d from the privilege management table 1157, and gives the player any points, gifts, etc. Grant a privilege.

  Note that the gaming machine 1300d has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here is configured such that the wireless signal does not include role information or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300d connected to the gaming machine 1300d, and the gaming machine ID and total game are transmitted to the portable terminal 1700. The number of times may be transmitted. Further, a radio signal is transmitted from a sand signal device 1370 or a radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300d to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it transmit game machine ID, the total number of times of a game, etc.

  By such privilege management communication processing, there is a possibility that a privilege is received by playing a game on the gaming machine 1300d, so that further interest is generated with respect to the game. In addition, it is almost unnecessary to operate the gaming machine 1300d or the portable terminal 1700 in order to receive a privilege, and the burden on the player is extremely small. Furthermore, with such a mechanism, a privilege can be given by an entity other than the hall store or the manufacturer of the gaming machine, which is effective in attracting customers or creating a topic.

  In addition, the user of the portable terminal 1700 assumed in the privilege management process of this embodiment is a player, for example.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
A gaming machine 1300d of this embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG.

  Note that the total number of games transmitted by the radio signal can be grasped based on the “total number of games” shown in FIG. The “total number of games” is stored in a prescribed external work area in the main RAM 103, and the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790 (via the sub-control circuit 200 ′) Provided to the BLE module 307. Data such as domain information, gaming machine ID, total number of games, and gaming information is provided from the gaming machine 1300c to the BLE module 307 of the data display device 300c via the sand device 1370, the hall computer 1200, or the like. May be.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the privilege management process of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92 shows an example of the privilege management table 1157. The privilege management table 1157 includes an application ID, the total number of games, a gaming machine ID, a game start flag, and an update date and time. As the game start flag, “1” is stored when a game is actually started on the gaming machine 1300d. The benefit is targeted to a player whose game start flag is “1”.

<Description of privilege management processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, privilege management processing in the gaming machine 1300d, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 will be described. 93 and 94 are flowcharts showing the procedure of privilege management processing executed by the gaming machine 1300d, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100. 93 and 94, the processing flow of the gaming machine 1300d, the portable terminal 1700, and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  This privilege management process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application from the predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, in the privilege management process, as described later, it is assumed that the application is activated with the reception of a radio signal as a trigger. Note that an application can be activated in advance, or a message prompting activation can be displayed when a wireless signal is received.

  First, the user (player) performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (1300d), for example, displays a menu on the sub display device 18, and instructs “select a privilege chance” there. Thereby, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300d starts recording the total number of games related to the player (S4121). The total number of games is accumulated in the sub RAM 202 ′ based on, for example, data on the total number of games transmitted from the microprocessor 791 (main CPU 701) of the main control circuit 790.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300d transmits a radio signal including the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games as, for example, a BLE standard beacon signal (S4122). Here, as described above, the total number of games is the number of games played by the player after instructing “select a privilege chance”. Since no games have been played at this time, the total number of games Is 0.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 'of the gaming machine 1300d determines whether or not a game is started (S4123). When the sub CPU 201 'determines that the game is not started (when S4123 is NO), the process returns to the process of S4123 and this determination process is repeated. When the sub CPU 201 'determines that the game has started (when S4123 is YES), the process proceeds to S4133, where a beacon transmission process after the game is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 held by the player determines whether or not a radio signal is received from the gaming machine 1300d (S4124). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no radio signal is received (when S4124 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S4124 is YES), the privilege management processing application is activated (eg, in the background) (S4125).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S4126). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4127). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4127 is NO), the process returns to S4124 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (when S4127 is YES), the domain information, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games are acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S4128).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal and the total number of games together with the application ID to the information management server 1100 (S4129). Here, access to the information management server 1100 is performed based on the domain information acquired from the received signal. For example, the domain information includes URL information indicating the address of the information management server 1100 on the Internet. The application ID is an ID stored in the above-described privilege management processing application, and a different ID is set for each user. In this process, the signal strength (for example, RSSI) of the received signal is evaluated, and the received signal strength is higher than a predetermined value assumed when the player holds the portable terminal 1700 at the seating position. It is determined that the signal is a signal from the gaming machine 1300d of the player, and data is transmitted to the information management server 1100.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the application ID, the gaming machine ID, and the total number of games from the mobile terminal 1700, a record including these data is added to the privilege management table 1157 (S4130). The update date / time is set by date / time information managed by the information management server 1100. Here, the game start flag is set to 0. Next, the completion of updating the privilege management table 1157 is notified to the portable terminal 1700 (S4131). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives a notification of the completion of the update of the privilege management table 1157 from the information management server 1100, a message such as a privilege chance participation message 1 (for example, “If you start a game, you can participate in the privilege opportunity!”). ) Is displayed on the display 1708 (S4132).

  At this time, in the gaming machine 1300d, transmission of a radio signal including the total number of games is continued (S4133), and when the player starts a game, the total number of games included in the radio signal is A value of 1 or greater is set.

  Here, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines again whether or not a wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300c has been received (S4134). When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S4134 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S4134 is YES), the main CPU 1701 decodes the received wireless signal to obtain a UUID (S4135). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4136). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4136 is NO), the process returns to S4134 to receive a radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (YES in S4136), the gaming machine ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S4137).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the gaming machine ID acquired from the received signal is the same as the gaming machine ID at the time of the privilege chance selection (S4138). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine ID is different (when S4138 is NO), the process returns to S4134 to receive a radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the gaming machine IDs are the same (when S4138 is YES), the main CPU 1701 determines whether it is a predetermined transmission timing (S4139). When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is not the predetermined transmission timing (when S4139 is NO), the process returns to S4134 to receive a radio signal. When the main CPU 1701 determines that it is the predetermined transmission timing (when S4139 is YES), it acquires the signal strength of the received radio signal (for example, RSSI of the beacon signal), and uses the signal strength as the gaming machine ID. The application ID and the total number of games are transmitted to the information management server 1100 (S4140).

  Next, when the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the signal strength from the mobile terminal 1700, it determines whether the user is away from the seat, that is, the signal strength received from the mobile terminal 1700 is equal to or less than a predetermined value (ie, Then, it is determined whether or not the portable terminal 1700 is separated from the gaming machine 1300c by a certain distance (S4141).

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the person is away (when S4141 is YES), the main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the user is not away (when S4141 is NO), the main CPU 1101 displays the total number of games in the record stored in the privilege management table 1157 (the record in which the gaming machine ID matches the application ID). Thus, it is determined whether or not the received total number of games is a large value (S4142).

  When the main CPU 1101 determines that the total number of games in the record stored in the privilege management table 1157 and the total number of games received are the same value, that is, the game has not started (if S4142 is NO) The main CPU 1101 ends the process. When the main CPU 1101 determines that the total number of games received is greater than the total number of games stored in the privilege management table 1157 (when S4142 is YES), the target record of the privilege management table 1157 On the other hand, the total number of games is updated to the received total number of games, and 1 is set to the game start flag (S4143). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process.

  When the information management server 1100 finishes updating the privilege management table 1157, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 displays a privilege chance participation message 2 (for example, a message such as “You have participated in a privilege opportunity!”) On the display 1708. (S4144). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 ends the process.

  In the gaming machine 1300d, the sub CPU 201 'determines whether or not an end operation has been performed (S4145). When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is no end operation (NO in S4145), the process returns to S4145 and waits for the end operation. When the sub CPU 201 'determines that there is an end operation (YES in S4145), the menu display is ended and the process is ended.

  By the processes shown in FIGS. 93 and 94, among the players who have selected the privilege chance, those who actually played the game are candidates for receiving the privilege. The information management server 1100 determines the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine to which the privilege is granted by lottery or the like at a predetermined timing, for example, once a day. When the gaming machine ID is determined, the information management server 1100 scans the privilege management table 1157 and checks whether there is a record having a gaming start flag of 1 for the corresponding gaming machine ID.

  Here, when there is a record whose game start flag is 1, benefits such as points and gifts are given to the player. For example, the number of points is stored in association with an application ID that identifies the user of the mobile terminal 1700 by a point management table (not shown). In addition, there are cases where a plurality of players are playing against the gaming machine 1300d having the same gaming machine ID. In this case, 1 (or the number of games, gaming time, etc.) Multiple players are determined. You may make it give a privilege to all the players who played with the gaming machine 1300d of the gaming machine ID.

  To a player who has been determined to grant a privilege, a message that the privilege has been granted is transmitted to the application that performs the privilege management process of the portable terminal 1700 of the player using the application ID. In this embodiment, as a privilege, for example, a point at which a product or service can be purchased in an application for performing privilege management processing, a present, or the like is given.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1300d to which a privilege is given is determined. However, even if a game with a game start flag set to 1 is extracted from among the records stored in the privilege management table 1157 by lottery or the like. Good. The subject to which the privilege is granted can be determined by various other methods and standards.

  The records stored in the privilege management table 1157 are basically all deleted when the above-described privilege grant processing is performed by the information management server 1100, but in order to be the next privilege grant target, It is also possible to leave some or all of them.

  Here, it is determined whether or not the person is away from the information in the information management server 1100, but the mobile terminal 1700 may determine this and transmit the determination result to the information management server 1100. Whether or not the player is seated (not leaving), for example, the signal strength of the radio signal received from the gaming machine 1300d is a predetermined level (for example, a level closer to the proximity, “almost contact”). If it is, the user can be determined to be seated. Moreover, you may determine seating using such a signal strength and the image picked-up by a camera, or an image determination result. In this example, the camera is provided with a sand device 1370 connected to the gaming machine 1300d (camera 1335). The image determination result or the like may be transmitted from the gaming machine 1300d (for example, by a wireless signal from the BLE module) to the portable terminal 1700.

  Furthermore, regarding the signal strength of the received radio signal, it is determined that the user is seated when the above-mentioned “substantially contact” level continues for a predetermined time or more, and the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300d is associated with the application ID at that time The information may be stored in the privilege management table 1157 of the information management server 1100. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a record from being easily stored in the privilege management table 1157 of the information management server 1100 by the passing player's application.

  In this way, the “privilege” given to the player can be set according to the “value” provided by the sales entity other than the hall store or the gaming machine manufacturer, for example. In addition, the game machine ID of the gaming machine to which the privilege is given, and designation of which player is to be given a score when a plurality of players play with one gaming machine can be performed at the hall store. A store manager or the like can perform these designations by operating a hall management terminal 1600 connected to the information management server 1100, for example.

  In this embodiment, the increase in the total number of games is grasped and it is determined that the player has played a game with the gaming machine 1300d. For example, the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300d received by the portable terminal 1700 When the signal strength was maintained at a level equal to or higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined period (a state close to or close to the gaming machine), the player sat down in front of the gaming machine 1300d and played a game. You may make it estimate with a thing.

<< Ninth Embodiment >>
Next, background art and problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, an AR display management process for transmitting and managing the gaming machine ID and the like of each gaming machine 1300 arranged in the hall store is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
In recent years, applications using AR (Augmented Reality) technology to add another information (display) to an image captured by a camera (real image) and expand the actual image are used in various fields. It has been. In game machines as well, proposals have been made to create an effect screen or the like by applying such AR technology.

For example, in the following patent document, an image (actual image) of a player's hand photographed by a camera and an effect animation image stored in the gaming machine are combined and displayed on the display device as an effect image.
Patent Document: JP 2010-172418 A

  However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document uses a camera of the gaming machine to diversify the effect screen displayed during the game, and the hall store visitor uses the passage for selecting and moving the gaming machine. No information can be provided to the player when moving.

<Effect>
With the information management system of this embodiment, information related to gaming machines and the like is notified by the AR on the mobile terminal while moving in the hall store, and the user's interest is improved (exciting feeling and surprise are provided to the user). )

<System overview>
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, for example, a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the gaming machine 1300e, and if it is determined that the gaming machine 1300e and the portable terminal 1700 are close to a predetermined distance, the wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300e is The included gaming machine ID is transmitted to the player's portable terminal 1700, and then the portable terminal 1700 transmits the gaming machine ID to the information management server 1100.

  When the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID, the information management server 1100 refers to the AR display management table 1158, acquires the display mark corresponding to the gaming machine 1300d of the gaming machine ID and the display mode thereof, and stores the data in the portable terminal 1700. Send. When the portable terminal 1700 receives these pieces of information, when the camera image is displayed on the display, the display mark overlaps the camera image and is displayed in the display mode.

  Note that the gaming machine 1300e has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine 1300 described above, but here is configured such that the wireless signal does not include role information or the like.

  In the present embodiment, a wireless signal is transmitted from a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in the data display device 300e connected to the gaming machine 1300e, and the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the portable terminal 1700. You may do it. In addition, a radio signal is transmitted from a sand signal device 1370 or a radio signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) incorporated in another peripheral device directly or indirectly connected to the gaming machine 1300e to the portable terminal 1700. You may make it transmit gaming machine ID.

  With such an AR display management process, when the camera of the mobile terminal 1700 is moved while shooting in the hall store and the camera image is displayed on the display, the display mark overlaps and is displayed. Creates further interest in hall stores and games. In addition, when an ambiguous recommendation table is suggested by a display mark or voice, it is possible to give a visitor a pleasure of searching for a prediction table based on limited information and making a prediction.

  Further, when a sudden event or campaign is notified by a display mark or sound, it can be an effect that creates a further interest and excitement for the visitor, which can be a great motivation for visiting the hall store.

  Note that the user of the mobile terminal 1700 assumed in the AR display management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player or a visitor to a hall store.

<Connection form of main control circuit and BLE module>
The gaming machine 1300e of this embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming machine 1300b of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the AR display management process of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 96 shows an example of the AR display management table 1158. The AR display management table 1158 includes a gaming machine ID, an estimated distance, a display mark, and a display mode. The display mode stores the display position, behavior, blinking, and the like. The display mark represents an object displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700. For example, “A” indicates an object (text, image, animation image, video, etc.) corresponding to “A”. The display position defines the position, arrangement pattern, and behavior for displaying the display mark on the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700. The time indicates the display time of the display mark on the display 1708. Blinking defines whether the display mark blinks on the display 1708.

<Description of AR display management processing in information management system>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98, the AR display management process in the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of AR display management processing executed by the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. In addition, in FIG. 97, the processing flow of the mobile terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of an AR display screen (camera image display screen) displayed on the display 1708 of the mobile terminal 1700.

  The AR display management process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700.

  First, the user operates the mobile terminal 1700 to start an application that executes the AR display management process. When an application for executing the AR display management process is started, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 activates the built-in camera 1704 under the control of the application (S4161). Next, the main CPU 1701 displays an image captured by the camera 1704 on the display 1708 as a camera image display screen as shown in FIG. 98 described later (S4162).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300e has been received (S4163). In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1300e always transmits a radio signal including the gaming machine ID at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval), so the description of the operation of the gaming machine 1300e is as follows. Omitted.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S4163 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (when S4163 is YES), the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received wireless signal (S4164). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4165). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4165 is NO), the process returns to S4163 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is the processing target (S4165 is YES), the distance between the portable terminal 1700 and the gaming machine 1300e is determined based on the signal strength (RSSI) of the decoded wireless signal. It is estimated and it is determined whether or not the distance is equal to or less than a predetermined value (S4166). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the estimated distance is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (S4166 is NO), the process returns to S4163 to receive a radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the estimated distance is equal to or less than the predetermined value (when S4166 is YES), the information management server 1100 obtains the gaming machine ID of the decoded wireless signal and the estimated distance obtained by the above processing. (S4167). Note that, here, the application that executes the AR display management process stores the address of the information management server 1100 and accesses the address. However, the gaming machine 1300c or the eighth of the seventh embodiment As in the gaming machine 1300d of the embodiment, domain information may be included in the radio signal, and the information management server 1100 may be accessed based on the domain information. Further, the main CPU 1701 can transmit the above-described gaming machine ID and estimated distance at predetermined intervals (for example, at intervals of every few seconds or every few minutes).

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the gaming machine ID and the estimated distance from the portable terminal 1700, the AR display management table 1158 is referred to determine displayable display marks and their display modes (S4168). For example, first, it is determined whether or not the AR display management table 1158 has the same record as the received gaming machine ID, and then the estimated distance stored in the AR display management table 1158 corresponding to the gaming ID. Is greater than the received estimated distance. When these conditions are satisfied, the display mark and the display mode stored in the record of the AR display management table 1158 are determined as data to be transmitted.

  By the processing referring to the AR display management table 1158, the criteria for displaying the display mark when the portable terminal 1700 approaches the gaming machine 1300e is different for each gaming machine 1300e. Further, the display mark and the display mode are set to be different for each gaming machine 1300e.

  Next, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 transmits data indicating the determined display mark and display mode to the portable terminal 1700 (S4169).

  When the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 receives the display mark and data indicating the display mode from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 edits the display mark so as to overlap and display the camera image based on the received display mode ( S4170). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 displays the edited video on the display 1708 as a camera image display screen (see FIG. 98) (S4171).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not an end operation has been performed (S4172). When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is no termination operation (when S4172 is NO), the process returns to S4163 to receive a beacon signal. When the main CPU 1701 determines that there is an end operation (YES in S4172), the display of the camera image display screen is ended and the processing is ended.

  As the display mark to be overlapped on the camera image, there are text, an image, an animation image, a video, and the like, but instead of such a visible object (or together with these objects), a voice, Various operations such as music, vibration, and lighting / flashing of the light can be performed by the portable terminal 1700. The mobile terminal 1700 includes, for example, a vibration motor (not shown), and the mobile terminal 1700 can be controlled to vibrate by driving the vibration motor. In addition, the mobile terminal 1700 includes, for example, an LED light (not shown) that can function as a camera flash or the like. The LED light can be controlled to be turned on / blink.

  A camera image display screen 3101 illustrated in FIG. 98 includes a video display unit 3102 that displays a video captured by the user with the camera 1704 of the mobile terminal 1700. In this example, the video display unit 3102 displays a gaming machine 1300e photographed by the user, and further displays an image 3103 displaying “recommended stand”.

  The image 3103 displayed in this way is displayed as a result of the gaming machine ID of the gaming machine 1300e being transmitted to the information management server 1100 via the portable terminal 1700 as described above. For example, since the upper center of the screen is set, it is not known which gaming machine 1300e is actually the recommended stand. After that, when the mobile terminal 1700 is moved, the display of the image 3103 is terminated because the distance from the target gaming machine 1300e (which cannot be grasped by the user) is increased. A predetermined standby time can be provided for the display start timing and the display end timing of the image 3103.

  In addition, it is possible to perform an image recognition process on the camera video, grasp the position and direction of the gaming machine 1300e and the like, and control to output a display mark or the like to the portable terminal 1700.

<< Tenth Embodiment >>
Next, the background technology and problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a notification information management process is realized in which the wireless signal transmission device 1800 arranged in the hall store transmits a notification ID, receives the notification ID by the portable terminal 1700, and acquires notification information corresponding to the notification ID. The

<Background technology and issues>
Some conventional gaming systems have a mechanism that gives a predetermined privilege to a player so that the degree of disadvantage to the player is reduced even when the game is played across a plurality of gaming machines. is there.

For example, in the gaming system described in the following patent document, after a card unit such as a gaming machine accepts a recording medium, the number of executions of a predetermined game is counted based on a predetermined condition. When the predetermined number of times is reached, a screen for selecting a privilege granted to the player is displayed on the display device of the card unit.
Patent Document: JP 2010-158309 A

  However, no system has been proposed so far, which provides information that is advantageous to those who enter the hall store or nearby people, regardless of the gaming situation in the gaming machine.

<Effect>
The information management system or the like according to the present embodiment can actively solicit users who are passing by and are located within a predetermined range, and can notify the contents according to the user attributes. Further, the information to be provided can be distinguished according to the user's moving direction (for example, entering or leaving a store).

<System overview>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the wireless signal transmission device 1800 and it is determined that the wireless signal transmission device 1800 and the portable terminal 1700 are close to a predetermined distance, the wireless signal transmission device. The notification ID included in the wireless signal from 1800 is transmitted to the player's portable terminal 1700, and then the portable terminal 1700 transmits the notification ID to the information management server 1100.

  When receiving the notification ID, the information management server 1100 refers to the notification information management table 1159, acquires the notification information corresponding to the notification ID, and transmits the notification information to the mobile terminal 1700. When receiving the notification information, the portable terminal 1700 displays the notification information on the display (for example, push display).

  Note that the wireless signal transmission device 1800 (not shown) includes a circuit in the same configuration as the BLE module 49 mounted on the external concentration terminal board 47 of the gaming machine 1300 described above. A radio signal including a predetermined notification ID is always transmitted at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval). The wireless signal transmission device 1800 does not have to be a single device, and can be configured to be incorporated in another device.

  By such notification information management processing, it is possible to actively solicit users who pass by in the vicinity of the hall stores, and effective notification according to the user attributes can be performed. In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1800 is a device that is disposed at the entrance of a hall store and can propagate a wide range of wireless signals (for example, a device including a BLE module having a BLE chip of Class 1 or Class 2).

  In addition, it is possible to configure the system so that effective notifications such as recommended information are provided to adults only for those who enter the hall stores. In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1800 is a device that is disposed at the entrance of a hall store and transmits a wireless signal in a relatively narrow range (for example, a device including a BLE module having a Class 3 BLE chip).

  In addition, the user of the portable terminal 1700 assumed in the notification information management process of the present embodiment is, for example, a player or a visitor to a hall store.

<Arrangement of radio signal transmitter>
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, the arrangement | positioning form of the radio signal transmission apparatus 1800 in a hall store is demonstrated. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating an arrangement example of the wireless signal transmission device 1800 in the hall store.

  FIG. 100A shows an example in which one radio signal transmission device 1800 is arranged in the vicinity of the front doorway 2011a in the hall store layout shown in FIG. The radio signal transmission device 1800 is disposed, for example, on an upper part of an automatic door installed at the front doorway 2011a.

  The wireless signal transmission device 1800 is a device that can transmit a wireless signal to a relatively wide range with a high output. For example, a BLE module having a BLE chip of Class 2 (maximum radio wave reach (standard value) of 10 m) is used. I have.

  Since the wireless signal transmission device 1800 has such a wide propagation range, for example, a predetermined message is also transmitted and displayed to the portable terminal 1700 of the passerby 2003 walking on the road in front of the hall store. can do.

  FIG. 100B shows an example in which two radio signal transmission devices 1800 are arranged in the vicinity of the front doorway 2011a in the hall store layout shown in FIG. For example, the wireless signal transmission devices 1800a and 1800b are respectively disposed on upper portions of the passage guides 2011-1 and 2011-2 extending from both ends of the automatic door installed in the front doorway 2011a to the inside of the hall store.

  These wireless signal transmission devices 1800 are devices that transmit wireless signals with low output, and include, for example, a BLE module having a BLE chip of Class 3 (maximum radio wave reach (standard value) of 1 m).

  In order for the two wireless signal transmission devices 1800 to transmit the notification ID in such a relatively narrow range, for example, the wireless signal transmission device 1800 is close to or passes through the automatic door installed at the front doorway 2011a of the hall store. A predetermined message can be transmitted and displayed only to the mobile terminal 1700 of the store visitor 2004.

<Configuration of tables used in information management system>
Next, a table for storing data used in the notification information management processing of the information management system 1001 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 101 shows an example of the notification information management table 1159. The notification information management table 1159 includes a notification ID, notification conditions, and notification information. A plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1800 can be arranged, and a corresponding notification ID is set according to each device. In this example, the notification condition is the number of points held by the user. Here, the notification information stores a pattern identification symbol. For example, in the case of “A”, the notification information is an object (text, image, animation image, video, etc.) corresponding to “A”.

<Description of Notification Information Management Processing in Information Management System>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, notification information management processing in the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing a procedure of notification information management processing executed by the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100. Also, in FIG. 102, the processing flow of the portable terminal 1700 and the information management server 1100 is shown in time series.

  This notification information management process can be executed by, for example, downloading an application from a predetermined server to the mobile terminal 1700. Here, in the notification information management process, as described later, it is assumed that the application is activated with the reception of a radio signal as a trigger. Note that an application can be activated in advance, or a message prompting activation can be displayed when a wireless signal is received. Further, the notification information can be transmitted only when the application is activated.

  First, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 held by the user determines whether or not a wireless signal from the wireless signal transmission device 1800 has been received (S4191). In this embodiment, since the wireless signal transmission device 1800 always transmits a wireless signal including the notification ID at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval), the operation of the wireless signal transmission device 1800 is performed. The description is omitted.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that no wireless signal is received (when S4191 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (YES in S4191), the notification information management processing application is activated (eg, in the background) (S4192).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S4193). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4194). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4194 is NO), the process returns to S4191 to receive a radio signal. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (YES in S4194), the notification ID is acquired from the decrypted radio signal (S4195).

  Next, the main CPU 1701 transmits the notification ID acquired from the received signal to the information management server 1100 together with the signal strength (for example, RSSI) of the received signal and the application ID (S4196). Here, the application that executes the notification information management process stores the address of the information management server 1100 and accesses the address. However, the gaming machine 1300c or the eighth of the seventh embodiment As in the gaming machine 1300d of the embodiment, domain information may be included in the radio signal, and the information management server 1100 may be accessed based on the domain information. Further, when the acquired notification ID is the same as that acquired last time, the main CPU 1701 omits the transmission of the notification ID, the signal strength, the application ID, and the like described above, or at predetermined intervals (for example, every few seconds, Or at intervals such as every minute).

  The application ID is an ID stored in the application of the notification information management process described above, and a different ID is set for each user.

  When the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 receives the notification ID, the signal strength, and the application ID from the portable terminal 1700, the main CPU 1101 searches the corresponding notification ID record with reference to the notification information management table 1159, and further, this record When the notification condition is satisfied, the notification information specified by the record is determined as the notification information to be transmitted (S4197).

  In this example, the notification condition is determined based on the member information of the user (for example, the number of points held by the user) and the estimated distance between the mobile terminal 1700 and the wireless signal transmission device 1800. The number of points can be obtained by referring to a user point table (not shown) based on the received application ID, and the estimated distance can be obtained from the received signal strength.

  Next, the main CPU 1101 of the information management server 1100 notifies the mobile terminal 1700 of the determined notification information (S4198). Thereafter, the main CPU 1101 ends the process. The transmitted notification information includes, for example, recommended information such as the number of points that are user member information, store visit points that are not member attributes, and guidance on popular models. Recommended information such as guidance on popular models can be performed at the hall store, and the manager of the hall store, for example, operates the hall management terminal 1600 connected to the information management server 1100 to display the recommended information and its information. Notification conditions can be entered.

  When receiving the notification information from the information management server 1100, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 displays the notification information on the display 1708, for example, in the form of a pop-up screen (S4199). Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4191 and receives a radio signal.

  In the present embodiment, notification conditions such as the number of points of the user and the estimated distance are set for each received notification ID, but such notification conditions may not be provided and notification may be performed unconditionally. Other notification conditions may be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, even if the received notification ID is the same, the content of the notification information is set to be different depending on the notification condition.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 100B, when the wireless signal transmission devices 1800a and 1800b are respectively arranged on the upper portions of the passage guides 2011-1 and 2011-2, the wireless signal transmission devices are arranged along the respective passage guides. Further, by determining the signal strength of a radio signal received from a nearby game machine, the user of the portable terminal 1700 proceeds in the direction of entering or exiting at the entrance of the hall store. Can be determined, and different notifications can be made according to the determination result.

<< Eleventh Embodiment >>
Next, background technology, problems, effects, configurations, and operations of the information management system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900 arranged in a hall store transmit wireless signals, receive them by the portable terminal 1700, and control wireless communication to perform unidirectional communication or bidirectional communication. Control processing is realized.

<Background technology and issues>
Conventionally, in wireless communication, a standard (protocol) that can switch between unidirectional communication that can transmit data in one direction and bidirectional communication that can transmit and receive data bidirectionally is known.

For example, the following patent document proposes an authentication system that switches between a one-way communication mode and a two-way communication mode between an authentication key that a user can carry and transmit authentication information and the user's mobile phone. Has been.
Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-109358

  However, the authentication system of the above-mentioned patent document controls the communication mode in the one-to-one communication between the authentication key and the mobile phone, and supports the communication mode control in the one-to-many communication. Absent. In the authentication system of the above patent document, both are based on communication between an authentication key that can be moved by a user and a mobile phone, and one movable device and a plurality of fixedly installed devices The communication mode is not switched between.

<Effect>
With the movement of the portable terminal, the apparatus is dynamically switched to the two-way communication with respect to the apparatus closest to the portable terminal, and the one-way communication is continued (or blocked) for the other apparatuses. Thus, the target devices for bidirectional communication are controlled to be sequentially switched, and information from the portable terminal can be transmitted to each device in order.

<System overview>
103 and 104 are diagrams showing an overview of an information management system according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention. In this embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900 (1900a, 1900b, 1900c), and the mobile terminal 1700 receives a wireless signal from the wireless signal transmission device 1900, for example. At that time, unidirectional communication is performed.

  In addition, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives wireless signals simultaneously from a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900, control is performed so as to perform bidirectional communication with one of the wireless signal transmission devices 1900. The wireless signal transmission device 1900 incorporates a wireless signal transmission circuit (for example, a BLE module) in a sand device 1370 or other peripheral devices directly or indirectly connected to the above-described gaming machines 1300, 1300a to 1300e. It may be a thing. Note that the wireless signal transmission device 1900 may be the gaming machine 1300, 1300a to 1300e described above.

  For example, FIG. 103A shows a situation where three wireless signal transmission devices 1900 (1900a, 1900b, 1900c) are arranged in a line and the mobile terminal 1700 is moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, it is assumed that the mobile terminal 1700 can receive only the radio signal transmitted by the radio signal transmission device 1900c.

  In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1900c and the portable terminal 1700 are unidirectionally communicated, and the portable terminal 1700 only receives a wireless signal from the wireless signal transmission device 1900c.

  The situation in which such unidirectional communication is performed corresponds to, for example, the advertising communication method in BLE.

  Next, FIG. 103B shows a situation where the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive the radio signals transmitted by the radio signal transmission device 1900b and the radio signal transmission device 1900c, and the distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is closer to the radio signal transmission device 1900c. It is assumed that the signal strength of the two radio signal transmitters 1900 is also the maximum.

  In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1900c and the portable terminal 1700 having the shortest distance shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmission device 1900b and the portable terminal 1700 are unidirectional communication.

  The situation where the transition from the unidirectional communication to the bidirectional communication as described above corresponds to the situation where, for example, the BLE shifts from the advertising communication system to the master / slave communication system.

  Next, FIG. 103C shows a situation where the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the mobile terminal 1700 can receive radio signals transmitted by the radio signal transmission device 1900a, the radio signal transmission device 1900b, and the radio signal transmission device 1900c, respectively, and the distance from the mobile terminal 1700 is a radio signal. It is assumed that the transmitting device 1900b is the closest and the signal strength of the received wireless signal is the maximum among these three wireless signal transmitting devices 1900.

  In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1900b and the portable terminal 1700 having the shortest distance shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmission device 1900c and the portable terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication. The wireless signal transmission device 1900a and the portable terminal 1700 are unidirectional communication.

  Next, FIG. 103D shows a situation where the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the portable terminal 1700 can receive wireless signals transmitted by the wireless signal transmission device 1900a and the wireless signal transmission device 1900b, and the distance from the portable terminal 1700 is closer to the wireless signal transmission device 1900a. It is assumed that the signal strength of the two radio signal transmitters 1900 is also the maximum.

  In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1900a and the portable terminal 1700 that are close to each other shift from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmission device 1900b and the portable terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication, The one-way communication between the wireless signal transmission device 1900c and the portable terminal 1700 ends.

  Next, FIG. 104A shows a situation where the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the portable terminal 1700 can receive only the radio signal transmitted by the radio signal transmission device 1900a.

  In this case, the wireless signal transmission device 1900a and the portable terminal 1700 shift from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication, and the wireless signal transmission device 1900b and the portable terminal 1700 end the unidirectional communication.

  Next, FIG. 104B shows a situation where the mobile terminal 1700 is further moving in the direction of the arrow C1. Here, the portable terminal 1700 cannot receive the radio signals of all the radio signal transmission devices 1900.

  In this case, the one-way communication between the wireless signal transmission device 1900a and the portable terminal 1700 ends.

  As described above, in the wireless communication control process of the present embodiment, when wireless signals from a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900 can be received, for example, the device having the highest received signal strength (that is, the most Bidirectional communication is realized for a device that is estimated to be close in distance, and unidirectional communication is controlled for other devices.

<Description of Wireless Communication Control Processing in Information Management System>
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the wireless communication control process in the portable terminal 1700 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the wireless communication control process executed by the mobile terminal 1700.

  First, the mobile terminal 1700 is powered on by the user, and the OS of the mobile terminal 1700 and an application that is automatically started at startup are executed.

  Next, the main CPU 1701 of the portable terminal 1700 determines whether or not a wireless signal from the wireless signal transmission device 1900 has been received (S4211). In this embodiment, each of the plurality of radio signal transmission devices 1900 always transmits a radio signal at a predetermined timing (for example, an advertisement interval). Is omitted.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a radio signal is not received (when S4211 is NO), the reception processing is repeated.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a wireless signal has been received (YES in step S4211), it activates an application for wireless communication control processing (eg, in the background) (S4212). Such an application of the wireless communication control process can be activated when the portable terminal 1700 is activated.

  Next, the main CPU 1701 acquires the UUID by decoding the received radio signal (S4213). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not the UUID is a processing target (S4214). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is not a processing target (when S4214 is NO), the process returns to S4211, and a radio signal is received. In this example, for example, an organization ID corresponding to the organization is set as the UUID, and by processing only the target UUID, it is possible to avoid processing unrelated radio signals or spoofed radio signals. be able to.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the UUID is a processing target (when S4214 is YES), the device ID is acquired from the signal strength of the received wireless signal and the decoded wireless signal, and these are associated with each other. Store (S4215). Here, the device ID is an identifier that can uniquely identify the wireless signal transmission device 1900. When the wireless signal transmission device 1900 is the above-described gaming machine 1300, 1300a to 1300e, the gaming machine ID can be used as the device ID.

  The device ID stored in this way is deleted when a radio signal is not received from the device with the device ID for a certain period of time.

  Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not there are a plurality of stored device IDs (S4216). When the main CPU 1701 determines that the stored device ID is not plural (when S4216 is NO), it determines whether the stored device ID is 0 (S4222). Here, when the main CPU 1701 determines that the stored device ID is 0 (when S4222 is NO), since no wireless signal transmission device 1900 has been found, the process returns to S4211, and the wireless Repeat signal reception.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the stored device ID is one (if S4222 is YES), only one wireless signal transmission device 1900 has been discovered. It is determined whether or not a plurality of items are stored (S4223).

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs have been stored until the previous time (when S4223 is YES), that is, when the state shown in FIG. 103D shifts to the state shown in FIG. Since communication has been performed, the bidirectional communication connection is closed (S4224). At this time, if the wireless signal transmission device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication), for example, the mobile terminal 1700 passes through the wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 sends the wireless signal transmission device 1900 to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 of the corresponding hall store. A request for switching the communication mode is transmitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4211, and repeats reception of the radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs have not been stored in the previous time (when S4223 is NO), that is, the communication partner has changed from 0 to 1, or remains at 1. The main CPU 1701 returns to S4211, and repeats reception of the radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that there are a plurality of stored device IDs (when S4216 is YES), the device ID with the closest estimated distance is identified from the signal strength stored in association with the device ID. (S4217). Next, the main CPU 1701 determines whether or not a plurality of device IDs have been stored until the previous time (S4218).

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that a plurality of device IDs have been stored until the previous time (in the case where S4218 is YES), the main CPU 1701 has the device ID specified this time and the device ID for which bidirectional communication has been established last time. It is determined whether or not they are the same (S4219). Here, when the main CPU 1701 determines that the device ID specified this time is the same as the device ID for which bi-directional communication was previously established (S4219 is YES), in this case, bidirectional Since there is no change in the communication target, no special processing is performed, and the process returns to S4211 to repeat reception of the radio signal.

  When the main CPU 1701 determines that the device ID specified this time is not the same as the device ID for which two-way communication has been established last time (when S4219 is NO), that is, the partner for the two-way communication is changed. Therefore, the bidirectional communication connection is closed for the previous bidirectional communication (S4220). This situation corresponds to the transition situation shown in FIGS. 103B to 103D, for example. At this time, if the wireless signal transmission device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from bidirectional communication to unidirectional communication), for example, the mobile terminal 1700 passes through the wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 sends the wireless signal transmission device 1900 to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 of the corresponding hall store. A request for switching the communication mode is transmitted.

  After the processing of S4220 or when it is determined that a plurality of device IDs are not stored until the previous time (when S4218 is NO), the main CPU 1701 determines that both the device ID specified this time and the portable terminal 1700 Processing for establishing a communication connection (bidirectional communication session) is performed (S4221). For example, when switching such a communication mode based on the BLE standard, in the first unidirectional communication situation, the wireless signal transmission device 1900 is in the state “Advertising”, and the portable terminal 1700 is in the state “Scanning”. When the mobile terminal 1700 shifts to the bidirectional communication mode, the portable terminal 1700 changes the state from “Scanning”-> “Standby”-> “Initiating”, where bi-directional communication is performed on the advertisement packet from the wireless signal transmission device 1900. Send a response to do. As a result, the mobile terminal 1700 transitions from the state “Initiating” to “Connection (master)”, and the wireless signal transmission device 1900 transitions from the state “Advertising” to “Connection (slave)”. Realized.

  At this time, if the wireless signal transmission device 1900 requires a communication mode switching request (switching request from unidirectional communication to bidirectional communication), for example, the mobile terminal 1700 passes through the wireless network. The information management server 1100 is requested to switch the wireless signal transmission device 1900 corresponding to the device ID, and the information management server 1100 sends the wireless signal transmission device 1900 to the target wireless signal transmission device 1900 via the hall computer 1200 of the corresponding hall store. A request for switching the communication mode is transmitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 1701 returns to S4211, and repeats reception of the radio signal.

  By such wireless communication control processing, when wireless signals are received from a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1900, bidirectional communication is realized between the wireless signal transmission device 1900 estimated to be the closest and the portable terminal 1700. As the mobile terminal 1700 moves, the bidirectional communication connection can be dynamically changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the partner of the two-way communication is the one device with the shortest distance, but it is also possible to perform two-way communication with respect to a plurality of devices. Various standards can be set. Moreover, the reference | standard for specifying the other party of such two-way communication can also be changed according to time or a condition.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the number of wireless communication partners (wireless signal transmission device 1900) is one, the bidirectional communication connection is closed. It can also be maintained until it cannot be received.

  Furthermore, when the number of wireless communication partners is changed from two to one (the transition state shown in FIGS. 103D and 104A), or when the number of wireless communication partners is changed from zero to one (in FIG. 103A). It is possible to set how to make a bidirectional communication connection for each of the (represented situations). For example, if the number of wireless communication partners is changed from 0 to 1, the communication is shifted to bidirectional communication. If the number of wireless communication partners is changed from 2 to 1, the communication is unidirectional. It can be controlled to remain (or shift to unidirectional communication).

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the wireless signal transmission device 1900 that is closest to the portable terminal 1700 is dynamically switched to bidirectional communication, and the other wireless signal transmission devices 1900 are Since communication in one direction is continued (or interrupted), the wireless signal transmission device 1900 that is the target of bidirectional communication is controlled to be sequentially switched with the movement of the portable terminal 1700. Information from 1700 can be transmitted to each wireless signal transmission device 1900 in order. Further, by such dynamic switching, information received from the radio signal transmission device 1900 closest to (or other specific) the mobile terminal 1700 is transferred to the next closest device as the mobile terminal 1700 moves. In this way, predetermined information is transferred between a plurality of radio signal transmission devices 1900 one after another as the mobile terminal 1700 moves (using the mobile terminal 1700 as an intermediate medium). It can be controlled to go.

  As described above, the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment have been described so that information such as the gaming machine ID is transmitted to the portable terminal 1700 mainly by transmitting a beacon signal based on the BLE standard. Transmission is only an example. By receiving a wireless signal transmitted based on another wireless communication standard by the portable terminal 1700, the mobile terminal 1700 can be configured to have the same effects as those shown in the first to eleventh embodiments.

<< Twelfth Embodiment >>
Next, the configuration and operation of an information management system according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, one or a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1950 arranged in the hall store transmit a wireless signal and receive it by the mobile terminal 1700 to estimate the position of the mobile terminal 1700, which The status of the portable terminal 1700 is determined such as whether it is closest to the gaming machine.

<System overview>
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an overview of an information management system according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. In the present embodiment, when a wireless signal such as a BLE standard beacon signal is transmitted from the wireless signal transmission device 1950 and the portable terminal 1700 receives the wireless signal from the wireless signal transmission device 1950, the wireless signal transmission device 1950 identifies the wireless signal. The signal ID (for example, beacon ID) and the signal strength at the time of reception (for example, RSSI) are transmitted to the information management server 1100. Thereafter, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the portable terminal 1700 based on the received data, and further, the portable terminal 1700 is closest to which gaming machine and which notification is to be transmitted. Determine whether.

  Using such a system configuration, in the privilege management process of the eighth embodiment, the AR display management process of the ninth embodiment, and the notification information management process of the tenth embodiment, the portable terminal 1700 is a gaming machine 1300d, Instead of receiving a wireless signal from the gaming machine 1300e and the wireless signal transmission device 1800, a wireless signal can be received from the wireless signal transmission device 1950 shown in FIG.

  For example, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the mobile terminal 1700 from the signal ID of the radio signal received from the mobile terminal 1700 from the radio signal transmission device 1950 and the signal strength at the time of reception, and based on the estimated position. The game machine 1300d or the game machine 1300e is detected, the game machine IDs corresponding to these game machines (see FIG. 91, FIG. 95) are specified, and the above process (ie, privilege management process, AR display management processing) is realized.

  Further, the information management server 1100 estimates the position of the mobile terminal 1700 from the signal ID of the radio signal received from the mobile terminal 1700 and the signal strength at the time of reception, and corresponds to the estimated position. The notification ID (see FIG. 99) to be obtained is obtained, and the notification information corresponding to the notification ID is transmitted to the portable terminal 1700, thereby realizing the above processing (that is, the notification information management processing).

<Overview of wireless signal transmitter and virtual beacon>
The radio signal transmission device 1950 transmits a plurality of radio signals (for example, a BLE beam transmitted by a BLE module) using a directional (or movable) antenna. The BLE beam is generated by, for example, a beam forming function that intensively emits radio waves in a specific direction. In the present embodiment, the directional antenna can also realize bidirectional communication for receiving a signal from the mobile terminal.

  The BLE module of the wireless signal transmission device 1950 is configured to include, for example, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a BLE chip. The CPU receives the data to be transmitted and controls the BLE chip so that the received data is transmitted as a radio signal (for example, a beacon signal). The ROM stores a program and other data for realizing the above-described operation of the CPU. The RAM temporarily stores the reception data described above and other necessary data. The BLE chip transmits received data as a radio signal via an antenna (in a predetermined direction) under the control of the CPU.

  Note that when the wireless signal transmission apparatus 1950 realizes bidirectional communication, the signal ID, signal strength, application ID, and the like of the wireless signal received by the mobile terminal 1700 are changed in the information management server 1100 as shown in FIG. Instead, it is received by the wireless signal transmission device 1950. Further, the wireless signal transmission device 1950 is connected to the information management server 1100 via a wired network or a wireless network, and as a result, information such as a signal ID from the portable terminal 1700 is provided to the information management server 1100. The

  The wireless signal transmission device 1950 is installed, for example, on the ceiling of a hall store, and transmits wireless signals associated with different signal IDs toward a plurality of surrounding directions. In the example of the wireless signal transmission device 1950 shown in FIG. 107, eight signals (signal ID signals indicated by 19050a to 1950h) are transmitted in eight different directions, for example, one of the hall store layouts shown in FIG. The range of the part (island 2035, island 2036) is covered. In addition, in FIG. 107, the situation where each wireless signal propagates radially in each direction is shown by a fan-shaped figure, but these figures are notation for convenience indicating the propagation image, and the circular arc of each figure is shown. The part does not indicate the radio signal arrival distance or the position of the same signal strength, and the straight line representing the radius of each figure accurately represents the radiation angle (lateral propagation range) of the radio signal I don't mean.

  In addition, when there is a wireless signal transmission device 1950 that covers the entire floor of the hall store with one unit, the wireless signal transmission device 1950 may be disposed near the center of the floor. The signal transmission device 1950 may be arranged at a plurality of positions on the floor so as to cover the entire floor.

  Further, for example, when one or a plurality of wireless signal transmission devices 1950 are devices that transmit a plurality of beacon signals based on the BLE standard, a range of floors to which the beacon signal does not reach is changed to another wireless signal (for example, And a signal based on a wireless LAN standard (IEEE802.11 or the like), and as a result, the entire floor may be covered by a wireless signal.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 107, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives a radio signal from the radio signal transmission device 1950 (in this example, a radio signal having a signal ID of 1950d to 1950f), the mobile terminal 1700, for example, Then, the information management server 1100 is accessed, and the signal ID, the signal strength of the received radio signal, and the application ID are transmitted to the information management server 1100. In this example, the signal strength of each radio signal represented by signal ID = 1950d, signal ID = 1950e, and signal ID = 1950f is transmitted in association with the signal ID. Further, although the accuracy of position estimation is reduced, the signal ID of one radio signal and the signal strength thereof may be transmitted.

  When the information management server 1100 receives the signal ID, the signal strength, and the application ID from the portable terminal 1700, the data, the arrangement position of the information management server 1100 in the hall store, and the transmission direction of the radio signal corresponding to the signal ID From the above, the position of the portable terminal 1700 in the hall store is estimated.

  Further, the information management server 1100 grasps the arrangement positions of the gaming machines 1300d and 1300e in the hall store (for example, the map information table 1153 in FIG. 63), and the estimated position of the portable terminal 1700 and the position information thereof. Therefore, it is possible to grasp which gaming machine is closest to the portable terminal 1700. Such a determination can be realized at a timing close to real time.

  By the processing of the information management server 1100 described above, for example, in the eighth embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 does not receive the gaming machine ID and the total number of games from each gaming machine 1300d, and the wireless signal transmission device 1950 is received. It is possible to determine which gaming machine 1300d has played a game by receiving a radio signal from and to update the privilege management table 1157. In the present embodiment, information such as the total number of games for confirming that a game has been played is not received, but the mobile terminal 1700 is close to the game machine 1300d for a predetermined time or more, or closer than the proximity. When it is determined that the game has been performed, it can be determined that a game has been played in the gaming machine 1300d.

  In the ninth embodiment, the information management server 1100 allows the mobile terminal 1700 to receive a radio signal from the radio signal transmission device 1950 without receiving a gaming machine ID from each gaming machine 1300e. Based on the gaming machine ID of the approaching gaming machine 1300e and the contents of the AR display management table 1158, a display for performing AR display on the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700 is determined. The mark and the display mode can be determined, and these can be transmitted to the mobile terminal 1700.

  Furthermore, the information management server 1100 grasps the road in front of the hall store and the position of the entrance of the hall store. From the estimated position of the mobile terminal 1700 and these position information, the mobile terminal 1700 It is possible to grasp the positional relationship with the road and the entrance / exit of the hall store at a timing close to real time.

  By such processing of the information management server 1100, for example, in the tenth embodiment, the mobile terminal 1700 transmits a radio signal without receiving a notification ID from the radio signal transmission device 1800 or the radio signal transmission device 1900. By receiving a radio signal from the device 1950, it is determined where the portable terminal 1700 is (for example, how close it is to the road in front of the hall store or the entrance of the hall store), and the determination result and Based on the content of the notification information management table 1159, notification information for notifying the display 1708 of the portable terminal 1700 can be determined and transmitted to the portable terminal 1700.

  Further, when the mobile terminal 1700 receives a radio signal from the radio signal transmission device 1950 (for example, at intervals of 1 second or less), the user of the mobile terminal 1700 proceeds in the direction of entering at the entrance of the hall store. It is possible to determine whether the vehicle is moving in the direction of exiting or not, and different notifications can be performed according to the determination result.

1, 1 ', 1''... pachislot 3L, 3C, 3R ... reel 4 ... reel display window 5 ... lock 6 ... information display 11 ... display device 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button 18 ... Sub-display device 47, 447, 547 ... External concentration terminal board 49, 449, 549 ... BLE module 49a, 449a, 549a ... CPU
49b, 449b, 549b ... ROM
49c, 449c, 549c ... RAM
49d, 449d, 549d ... BLE chip 71 ... main control board 72 ... sub control board 90 ... main control circuit 91 ... microprocessor 95 ... ratio monitor 101 ... main CPU
102 ... Main ROM
103 ... Main RAM
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 107 ... Arithmetic circuit 114 ... 1st serial communication circuit 200 ... Sub control circuit 201 ... Sub CPU
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 300 ... Data display apparatus 1001 ... Information management system 1100 ... Information management server 1200 ... Hall computer 1300, 1300a, 1300b, 1300c, 1300d, 1300e ... Gaming machine 1350 ... Data display apparatus 1370 ... Sand device 1400 ... Island edge counter 1500 ... POS
1600: Hall management terminal 1800, 1800a, 1800b ... Radio signal transmitter 1900, 1900a, 1900b, 1900c, 1950 ... Radio signal transmitter

Claims (3)

Wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted from the gaming machine by wireless communication;
Gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying the gaming machine and gaming performance information relating to the gaming machine from the signal received by the wireless signal receiving means;
A portable terminal comprising: gaming machine information display control means for controlling to display information relating to the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information based on the reception status of the signal in the wireless signal receiving means. Mobile device
Wireless signal receiving means for receiving a signal transmitted from a gaming machine by wireless communication;
Gaming machine information acquisition means for acquiring gaming machine identification information for identifying the gaming machine and gaming performance information relating to the gaming machine from the signal received by the wireless signal receiving means; and
A program that functions as a gaming machine information display control unit that controls to display information about a gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information based on a reception status of the signal in the wireless signal receiving unit. A gaming machine that transmits signals by wireless communication;
An information management system including a server for providing information relating to the gaming machine to a mobile terminal,
The gaming machine transmits gaming machine identification information for identifying the gaming machine and gaming result information regarding the gaming machine by the wireless communication,
The server provides hall terminal gaming machine identification information regarding a plurality of gaming machines in the hall shop to the mobile terminal;
When the portable terminal receives the signal from the gaming machine, the reception status of the signal, the gaming machine identification information acquired from the signal, and the gaming machine identification information in the hall store acquired from the server The information management system is capable of displaying information related to the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming machine identification information together with information related to the gaming machine identification information in the hall store.

Images